9400 SWP10

SWP 9400AWY R1.0 C.T. OPER.
HDBK
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRELIMINARY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HANDBOOK APPLICABILITY, PURPOSE AND HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HANDBOOK STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAUTIONS TO AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QUICK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 11 12 12 13 15 18
SECTION 1: INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 SWP INSTALLATION IN PC ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1.1 PC characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1.2 Operator skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2 Summary of SW installation phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 SWP loading in PC WINDOWSNT/2000/XP environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3.1 Installation of 1320CT + NE software from SWP CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3.2 Installation of SIBDL program from SWP CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3.3 End of SW installation from SWP CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3.4 Deinstallation phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4 CT initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4.1 Craft Terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4.2 Craft Terminal connection to the NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 SWP DOWNLOAD TOWARD NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.1 NE hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.2 Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.3 Operator skills and profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2 Summary of the SWP installation phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 SW download to the NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03 02 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
21
23 23 23 23 23 24 24 54 54 54 56 56 57 59 59 59 59 59 60 60
041222 040723 040519 DATE
S404102601 S404070501
A.BESTETTI ITAVE A.FUMAGALLI A.FUMAGALLI ITAVE V.RODELLA A.FUMAGALLI ITAVE G.CONSONNI APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
G.ZILIANI RTT E.CORRADINIC.NAVA G.ZILIANI RTT E.CORRADINIITAVE G.ZILIANI RTT E.CORRADINI ITAVE ORIGINATOR
ED
CHANGE NOTE
9400AWYFSO REL.1.0 SWP VERSION UP TO V1.0.2 OPERATORS HANDBOOK
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 1 / 296
12.4 NE Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6 Configuration data definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 NE UPGRADE TO A NEWER SWP VERSION (SAME SWP RELEASE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72 73 73 75
SECTION 2: AWY/FSO NE MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21 GENERAL INTRODUCTION ON VIEWS AND MENUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1 9400 AWY/FSO view organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1.1 View Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1.2 Resource Tree Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1.3 Resource Detail Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1.4 Button Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2 Introduction to the menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2.1 Views menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2.2 Configuration menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2.3 Diagnosis menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2.4 Supervision menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2.5 Download menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
79 79 81 82 83 83 84 85 87 87 88 88
22 CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 22.1 NE Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 22.2 Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 22.2.1 Local Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 22.2.2 Ethernet Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 22.2.3 IP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 22.2.4 Routing information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 22.3 Alarm Severities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 22.3.1 How to create a new Alarm Severity Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 22.4 System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 22.4.1 NE Configuration (V 1.0.0 and V 1.0.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 22.4.2 NE Configuration (V 1.0.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 22.4.3 Link Indentifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 22.4.4 Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 22.5 Quick Configuration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 23 EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1 IDU level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1.1 1+0 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1.2 1+0 extendable and 1+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1.3 Procedure for configuration change from 1+0 extendable to 1+1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1.4 Board level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.2 ODU level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.3 Tab panels in the Resource Detail Aarea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.3.1 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.3.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.3.3 Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 LINE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1 Tab panels in the Resource Detail Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1.1 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 130 130 131 131 132 133 134 134 135 135 137 138 138 138
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 2 / 296
25 RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2.1 Local or Remote Transmitter Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2.2 ODU service kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2.3 Alarm Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.3 Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.3.1 Tx Radio Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.3.2 Rx Radio Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4 RTPC & ATPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4.1 ATPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4.2 Tx Nominal Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4.3 Tx Current Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4.4 ATPC Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4.5 ATPC Rx Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5 Power Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5.1 How to read a Power Measurement file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 FSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1 Channel#1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2 FSO Port#1 Ch#1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2.1 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2.3 Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.3 Laser#1 or Laser#2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 EXTERNAL POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1 Input External Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2 Output External Points (in V.1.0.0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3 Output External Points (in V.1.0.1 and V.1.0.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 SUPERVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.1 Access state (allow or inhibit NE Craft access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.1.1 Switching from the OS to the Craft Terminal access state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.1.2 Switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state . . . . . . 28.2 Restart NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.3 SW key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 PROTECTION SCHEMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1 Mux Protection Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1.1 Schema Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1.2 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.2 Radio Protection Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.2.1 Schema Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.2.2 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.3 HST Transmission Protection Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.3.1 Schema Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.3.2 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 LOOPBACKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210.1 Available Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210.1.1 1+0 FSO Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210.1.2 1+0 Radio Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210.1.3 1+1 Radio Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210.2 How to activate a loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143 144 144 144 144 144 145 145 145 146 146 146 146 147 147 147 151 153 154 155 156 156 156 161 163 163 164 165 167 167 167 168 168 169 171 172 173 173 175 176 176 178 178 179 181 182 183 186 189 192
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 3 / 296
210.3 How to remove a loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211.1 Log Browsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211.2 Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211.3 Abnormal Condition List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211.4 Summary Block Diagram View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211.5 Current Configuration View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 PERFORMANCE MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212.1 General information on the performance monitoring process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212.2 Performance menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212.3 CD (Current Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212.3.1 CD parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212.3.2 CD Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212.4 HD (History Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212.4.1 HD Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212.5 Threshold Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 SW DOWNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213.1 Server Access Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213.2 Init SW Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213.3 SW Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
193 195 195 195 196 196 200 201 201 203 205 206 206 207 207 208 211 211 212 213
SECTION 3: AWY/FSO MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

31 MAINTENANCE INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.1 Maintenance of the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.2 Problems with THE Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1 Purpose of this procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2 Corrective Maintenance general flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.3 Troubleshooting organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.4 Troubleshooting by means of the Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.4.1 Alarm synthesis indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.4.2 Details on alarms / statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.5 Description of alarms and of probable causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 216 216 217 217 217 218 220 221 222 224
SECTION 4: SWP DESCRIPTION AND VERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

41 SWP 9400AWY R.1.0 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.2 Software product list and part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.3 Software licence list and part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 SWP REG.9400AWY R.1.0 V1.0.0 SPECIFIC INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.1 ECT requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.2 SWP version specific data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.2.1 SW Package Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.2.2 SW Package Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.2.3 ECT SW SubComponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.2.4 NE MIB Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.3 New features and modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.4 Restrictions and known problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 229 229 230 231 231 232 232 232 232 232 233 233
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 4 / 296
42.5 New features and modifications of SWP versions higher than V.1.0.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 SWP REG.9400AWY R.1.0 V1.0.1 SPECIFIC INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.1 ECT requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.2 SWP version specific data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.2.1 SW Package Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.2.2 SW Package Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.2.3 ECT SW SubComponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.2.4 NE MIB Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.3 New features and modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.4 Restrictions and known problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.5 Operative hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.6 New features and modifications of SWP versions higher than V.1.0.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 SWP REG.9400AWY R.1.0 V1.0.2 SPECIFIC INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.1 ECT requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.2 SWP version specific data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.2.1 SW Package Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.2.2 SW Package Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.2.3 ECT SW SubComponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.2.4 NE MIB Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.3 New features and modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
233 235 235 236 236 236 236 236 237 238 238 238 239 239 240 240 240 240 240 240
SECTION 5: APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

APPENDIX A : EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1 : Functions and configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2 : IDU and ODU Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.1 : IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.2 : ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.3 : Allowed Equipment Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.4 : Remote Inventory Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX B : SW ALLOCATION, FLASH CARD AND EQUIPMENT CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1 : Allocation of equipment and craft terminal software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2 : Flash Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.1 : Flash Card types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.2 : Flash Card identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.3 : Flash Card contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.4 : Flash Card upgrade (for 9400AWY only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3 : Equipment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.1 : Interfaces (see Fig. 157. on page 243): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.2 : OperatorEquipment Interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.3 : ECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.4 : RECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX C : GENERAL ON SWP INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1 : Troubleshooting situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2 : Common situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D : ECTEQUIPMENT CONNECTION VIA PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.1 : Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.2 : Certified equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.3 : Connection cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 244 245 245 246 247 249 251 252 254 254 254 255 255 256 256 256 257 257 259 260 261 263 263 264 265
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 5 / 296
APPENDIX E : DOCUMENTATION GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E.1 : Handbook guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E.1.1 : Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E.1.2 : Purpose of the handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E.1.3 : Handbook history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E.2 : Documentation set description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E.2.1 : 9400AWY Rel.1.0 productreleaseversion handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E.2.2 : 9400FSO Rel.1.0 productreleaseversion handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E.2.3 : Handbooks common to 9400AWY Rel.1.0 and 9400FSO Rel.1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E.2.4 : Specific documentation for SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E.2.5 : General on Alcatel Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX F : ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX G : GLOSSARY OF TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
273 273 274 275 276 279 280 282 284 285 285 289 293
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 6 / 296
D.4 : Modem setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.4.1 : Setting of Sportster Flash Modem & 3Com 56K Faxmodem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.4.2 : TD32 AC Modem setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.5 : PC laptop Dell Latitude setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.6 : Setting up the connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.7 : Changing the ECTequipment connection speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.7.1 : Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.7.2 : Configuration at PC side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
266 266 268 269 270 271 271 272
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

FIGURES Fig. 1. Windows NT installation step 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 2. Windows NT installation step 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 3. Windows NT installation step 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 4. Windows NT configuration step 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 5. Windows NT configuration step 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 6. Windows NT configuration step 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 7. Windows NT configuration step 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 8. Windows NT configuration step 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 9. Windows NT configuration step 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 10. Windows 2000 installation step 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 11. Windows 2000 installation step 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 12. Windows 2000 installation step 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 13. Windows 2000 installation step 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 14. Windows 2000 installation step 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 15. Windows 2000 configuration step 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 16. Windows 2000 configuration step 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 17. Windows 2000 configuration step 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 18. Windows XP installation step 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 19. Windows XP installation step 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 20. Windows XP installation step 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 21. Windows XP installation step 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 22. Windows XP installation step 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 23. Windows XP configuration step 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 24. Windows XP configuration step 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 25. Windows XP configuration step 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 26. Windows XP configuration step 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 27. Deinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 28. 9400 AWY Main view organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 29. View Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 30. Resource tree area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 31. Tab panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 32. NE Time dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 33. Network Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 34. Local Configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 35. Ethernet Configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 36. IP configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 37. IP static routing configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 38. Create Static routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 39. Point To Point Interface Choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 40. OSPF Area configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 41. Create New OSPF Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 42. IP Address configuration of PointToPoint Interfaces screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 43. Routing information screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 44. Alarm Severities Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 45. Name of a cloned alarm profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 46. Clone of an Alarm Severity Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 47. Selection of a new severity in the Service Affecting field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 48. Selection of a new severity in the No Service Affecting field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 49. System Settings: NE configuration (V 1.0.0 and V 1.0.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 50. System Settings: NE configuration (V 1.0.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
29 30 30 31 32 32 33 34 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 55 80 81 82 86 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 102 103 103 104 105 106 108
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 7 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 51. Confirmation message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 52. USM closing warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 53. System Settings: Link Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 54. Overhead Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 55. Quick Installation Procedure: NE Configuration (Step 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 56. Quick Installation Procedure: Frame Configuration (Step 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 57. Quick Installation Procedure: Tributaries Configuration (Step 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 58. Quick Installation Procedure: Tributaries Configuration (Step 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 59. Quick Configuration Procedure: Channels Configuration (Step 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 60. Quick Configuration Procedure: Local IP Address (Step 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 61. Quich Installation Procedure: OSPF Area Configuration (Step 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 62. Quick Installation Procedure: IP Static Router Configuration (Step 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 63. Quick Configuration Procedure: NMSRF Interface Configuration (Step 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 64. Quick Configuration Procedure: NMSV11 Interface Configuration (Step 10) . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 65. Quick Configuration Procedure: NMSG703 Interface Configuration (Step 11) . . . . . . . . . Fig. 66. Quick Installation Procedure: Ethernet Configuration (Step 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 67. Quick Configuration Procedure: Summary (Step 13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 68. 1+0 FSO Equipment view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 69. 1+0 Radio Equipment view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 70. 1+1 Radio Equipment view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 71. 1+0 EXP Radio Equipment view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 72. 1+0 IDU view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 73. 1+1 IDU view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 74. Main board view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 75. FSO ODU view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 76. Radio ODU view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 77. Alarm tab panel for a selected object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 78. Configuration tab panel for a selected object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 79. Remote Inventory tab panel for a selected object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 80. Line Interface View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 81. Line Interface View: E1 Tributary Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 82. Line Interface View: E3 Tributary Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 83. Line Interface View: DS1 Tributary Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 84. Line Interface View: DS3 Tributary Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 85. Radio Domain View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 86. Radio Frequency menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 87. Rtpc & Atpc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 88. Power Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 89. Power Measurement Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 90. Power Meas Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 91. Name of File ( Log File ) selected screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 92. Example of Power Measurement File Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 93. Example of Power Measurement File Reading (with WordPad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 94. FSO Domain View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 95. FSO port configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 96. Measurements screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 97. Power Measurement Graphic Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 98. Details Dialog screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 99. Name of File ( Log File ) selected screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 100. Example of Power Measurement File Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 101. Example of Power Measurement File Reading (with WordPad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 102. FSO laser configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 103. Input External Point View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 104. Output External Points View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
109 109 111 112 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 128 129 130 131 132 133 133 134 135 135 137 138 138 141 141 143 145 146 147 149 150 151 151 152 154 155 156 157 158 159 159 160 161 163 164
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 8 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 105. Output External Points View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 106. Configuration of the Craft access state from the Equipment NE view in the OS mode . . Fig. 107. Restart NE call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 108. Restart NE confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 109. SW key screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 110. Protection Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 111. Mux Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 112. Mux Protection Switch (Spare #0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 113. Mux Protection Switch (Main #1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 114. Radio Protection View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 115. Radio Protection Switch (Spare #0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 116. Radio Protection Switch (Main #1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 117. Transmission Protection View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 118. Tx Protection Commands (Spare #0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 119. Tx Protection Commands (Main #1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 120. 1+0 FSO available loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 121. Channel 1 Loopback View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 122. Tributaries Loopback View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 123. 1+0 FSO Loopback types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 124. 1+0 Radio available loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 125. Channel 1 Loopback View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 126. Tributaries Loopback View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 127. 1+0 Radio Loopback types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 128. 1+1 Radio available loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 129. Channel 1 Loopback View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 130. Tributaries Loopback View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 131. 1+1 Radio Loopback types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 132. Loopback activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 133. Loopback removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 134. Diagnosis menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 135. Summary Block Diagram View: 1+0 FSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 136. Summary Block Diagram View: 1+0 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 137. Summary Block Diagram View: 1+1 HST Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 138. Summary Block Diagram View: 1+1 FD Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 139. Radio section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 140. Anomalies, defects, errored blocks, ES and SES according to ITUT G.826 . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 141. Performance View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 142. Threshold table association screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 143. Current Data View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 144. History Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 145. Thresholds Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 146. Threshold table configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 147. Server access configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 148. Init Software Download screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 149. SW Status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 150. SW Unit Status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 151. Corrective Maintenance general flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 152. Active alarm screem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 153. (1+0) IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 154. (1+1) and (1+0 expandable) IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 155. (1+0) ODU (electrical or optical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 156. (1+1) ODU (only electrical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 157. Interfaces for equipment control and Flash card label on MAIN Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 158. MAIN unit + FLASH CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
165 167 168 168 169 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 183 184 184 185 186 187 187 188 189 190 190 191 192 193 195 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 207 208 209 211 212 213 214 217 222 245 245 246 246 251 251
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 9 / 296
TABLES Tab. 1. Radio application: Market, capacity and modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Tab. 2. FSO application: Market, capacity and modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Tab. 3. Radio application: Market, capacity and modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Tab. 4. FSO application: Market, capacity and modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Tab. 5. Command priority list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Tab. 6. Command priority list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Tab. 7. Command priority list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Tab. 8. Loopbacks on the local NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Tab. 9. 1+0 FSO loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Tab. 10. 1+0 Radio loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Tab. 11. 1+1 Radio loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Tab. 12. SES Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Tab. 13. Alarm Synthesis indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Tab. 14. Alarm information, general description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Tab. 15. General issues of the alarm meanings and their respective maintenance actions . . . . . . . 225 Tab. 16. Software products part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Tab. 17. Software licence part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Tab. 18. Markets, product type, tributaries and modulations forecasted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Tab. 19. Shelves Equipment Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Tab. 20. IDU allowed board/plugin types in (1+0) configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Tab. 21. IDU allowed board/plugin types in (1+1) and (1+0 expandable) configurations . . . . . . . . 248 Tab. 22. Allowed board types in optical ODU ETSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Tab. 23. Available Flash cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Tab. 24. Handbook history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Tab. 25. 9400AWY Rel.1.0 product release handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Tab. 26. 9400AWY Rel.1.0 Technical Handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Tab. 27. 9400AWY Rel.1.0 Installation and LineUp Handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Tab. 28. 9400AWY Rel.1.0 Documentation on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Tab. 29. 9400FSO Rel.1.0 product release handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Tab. 30. 9400FSO Rel.1.0 Technical Handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Tab. 31. 9400FSO Rel.1.0 Installation and LineUp Handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Tab. 32. 9400AWY Rel.1.0 Documentation on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Tab. 33. Operators Handbooks related to the specific Software Package SWP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Tab. 34. Documentation common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform . . . . . . . . . 284
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 10 / 296
Fig. 159. FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 160. Equipment main parts containing local SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 161. Software management main phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 162. ECTEquipment connection via Public Switched Telephone Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 163. ECTLocal external Modem cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 164. F InterfaceRemote Modem cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 165. TD32 AC modem dipswitch setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 166. Alcatel Lower Layers utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 167. Example of SWP Release and Version numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 168. Example of Product levels and associated Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
251 252 259 263 265 265 268 272 286 287
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
a)
Warranty Any warranty must be referred exclusively to the terms of the contact of sale of the equipment this handbook refers to. ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
b)
Information The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the part of ALCATEL.
c)
Copyright Notification The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
d)
Safety recommendations The safety recommendations here below must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment: 1) Service Personnel Installation and service must be carried out by authorized people having appropriate technical training and experience necessary to be aware of hazardous operations during installation and service and of measures to avoid any danger to them, to any other people and to the equipment. Access to the Equipment Access to the Equipment in use must be restricted to Service Personnel only. Safety norms Recommended safety norms are not indicated in this manual, but in Handbooks REF. [A] on page 281 and [E] on page 283. The warning labels that can be found on the equipment parts are indicated on page 13. Local safety regulations must be used if mandatory. Safety instructions in such handbook should be used in addition to the local safety regulations. In the case of conflict between safety instructions stated in such manual and those indicated in local regulations, mandatory local norms will prevail. Should not local regulations be mandatory, then safety norms in the above cited manual will prevail.
2) 3)
e)
Service Personnel skill Service Personnel must have been an adequate technical training on telecommunications and in particular on the equipment this handbook refers to. Reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in para.E.2 on page 279 is usually not enough to properly install, operate and maintain equipment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 11 / 296
HANDBOOK APPLICABILITY, PURPOSE AND HISTORY

Please refer to para.E.1 on page 273.
HANDBOOK STRUCTURE
Information in this handbook is divided into the following parts: a) FRONT MATTER TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES PRELIMINARY INFORMATION HANDBOOK STRUCTURE SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING CAUTIONS TO AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE QUICK GUIDE It allows to access immediately the most frequently needed operative pieces of information contained in this handbook and in other related handbooks. SECTION 1: INSTALLATION on page 21 This part describes in detail the operations necessary for the SWP installation and upgrading (ECT parts and equipment parts). SECTION 2: AWY/FSO NE MANAGEMENT on page 77 In this section, the description of the menu structure and of all the AWY and FSO NE functionalities available in the Craft Terminal is given. SECTION 3: AWY/FSO NE MAINTENANCE on page 215 In this section the description of the AWY and FSO NE troubleshooting based on the use of the Craft Terminal is given. SECTION 4: SWP DESCRIPTION AND VERSIONS on page 227 This section gives information on the Software Packages this handbook refers to, and that are both independent and independent on the specific SWP Version: commercial information (SWP and Software Licences P/Ns), PC requirements, SW Package Identification, SW Package Components, ECT SW SubComponent, NE MIB Compatibility and additional features of new SWP versions. SECTION 5: APPENDICES on page 241 In this section some additional information and instructions are given: Equipment description and components SW allocation, Flash Card and equipment control General on SWP installation ECTEquipment connection via public switched telephone network Documentation Guide Acronyms and abbreviations Glossary of terms
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 12 / 296
SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING

a)
Please refer to Technical Handbook to obtain details regarding following information: Compliance with European norms Safety rules: TOPIC General rules Dangerous Electrical Voltages WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT
Harmful optical signals For 9400FSO read carefully next page Risk of explosion
Moving mechanical parts
Heatradiating mechanical parts
Equipment emitting RF power
Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges: TOPIC WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT
Device sensitive to electrostatic discharges
b)
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) Other Labels affixed to the Equipment
Identical or similar information on Personal Computer, WorkStation etc., other than ALCATELs, loaded with software applications described in this Handbook, is supplied in the Constructors technical documentation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 13 / 296
WARNING FOR 9400FSO ODU EQUIPMENT!

CAUTION: USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS LASER RADIATION EXPOSURE! Product Laser Safety The following special notes provide the laser safety specifications for the 9400FSO Terminal:
INFORMATION ALERT!
LASER DEVICES PRESENT WITHIN THIS EQUIPMENT ARE HAZARDOUS WHEN VIEWED WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS. LASER HAS THE FOLLOWING OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS UNDER MAXIMUM CONDITIONS: Laser Type Wavelength (nm) Output Power (mW) VCSEL 835 865 16 EN CLASS 1M laser products According to EN 608251 ; EN 608252
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS (BINOCULARS OR TELESCOPES) CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 14 / 296
CAUTIONS TO AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE

a)
Antistatic protection device kit When operating on boards out of the equipment shelf, this kit (see figure below) must be always warn and its termination must be connected to a grounded structure, to avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges.
ELASTICIZED BAND COILED CORD b) Boards extraction/insertion levers on ACCESS, MAIN IDU and EXTENSION IDU units These units are provided with levers to facilitate their extraction and insertion from/into the shelf. In turn, such levers are provided with screws that: must be loosened, before operating on levers for the unit extraction from the shelf; this avoids the breakage of levers must be tightened, after the unit insertion in the shelf; this ensures the equipment EMIEMC performance. Please refer to page 17 for more information [ points h ) , i ) and j ) ]. c) Unit assemblies Each of the ACCESS, MAIN IDU, EXTENSION IDU and FANS unit assembly (main board + baby board(s) + front plate) must be considered an unique item from the service and maintenance points of view. Such an assembly is supplied by Alcatel as it is and must never be disassembled. d) Screw fixing All boards and dummy plates are provided with screws that, in normal operation conditions, must be always tightened onto the shelf to avoid their detachment and to ensure the equipment EMIEMC performance and correct ventilation. The screw tightening torque for fixing the units to the subrack must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 % 2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) " 10 %

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 15 / 296
e)
IDUODU cable disconnection / connection Before to disconnect or connect the IDUODU cable (at IDU or ODU side) switch off the corresponding MAIN IDU UNIT or EXTENSION IDU UNIT.
f)
Craft Terminal connection To connect the CT cable (at IDUs F interface and/or PC side): verify that the PC is switched off (if switched on, close all running applications, then switch off it) connect suitable cable to IDUs F interface and PC side now the PC can be safely switched on.
g)
Craft Terminal disconnection To disconnect the CT cable (at IDUs F interface and/or PC side): perform the logoff, exiting from the CT applications close all other running applications, if any switch off the PC now the cable can be safely disconnected.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 16 / 296
h)
Right operations for board insertion in the subrack
1) Open the levers before to plug the unit.
2) To mate the plastic body of the connectors: push on the front panel, balancing the strain without push on the levers.
3) Push on the levers in order to finish the connector mating. i)
4) Fix the unit to the subrack by means of screws (max tightening torque specified in point d ) on page 15
Forbidden operations for board insertion in the subrack
NO
Dont push just on one lever only.
NO
Dont force the units.
NO
Avoid impact during the units handling.
j)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To populate an empty subrack 1 ) insert one unit at a time 2 ) fix the unit to the subrack by means of screws, before to insert another unit.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 17 / 296
QUICK GUIDE
C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK SWP 9400AWY R.1.0
If you need immediate operative information on how to: GENERAL TOPICS FOR 9400AWY AND 9400FSO get information on system documentation get information on safety, EMC, ESD norms and equipment labelling read Appendix E on page 273 read page 13 read: have the description of the system from the software point of view Chapter 41 on page 229 Appendix A on page 243 Appendix B on page 251 logically configure a station (or change its configuration) and logically setup connections logically provision equipment boards get item P/Ns get operative information regarding the units in IDU shelf and ODU (connectors, leds, buttons)
get: 9400AWY Technical Handbook (R f [A] on page 281) T h i l H db k (Ref. or 9400FSO Technical Handbook (Ref. [E] on page 283) SO f and read its QUICK GUIDE (same topics) HW INSTALLATION For:
physically install and cable the equipment hardware
9400AWY, get 9400AWY Rel.1.0 Installation Handbook (Ref.[B] on page 281) and proceed as specified by it 9400FSO, get 9400FSO Rel.1.0 Installation Handbook (Ref.[F] on page 283) and proceed as specified by it
continues ..
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 18 / 296
.. continues If you need immediate operative information on how to:

SWP INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING install SWP (first time) on ECT download SWP (first time) into the equipment proceed as specified in chapter 11 on page 23 proceed as specified in chapter 12 on page 59 For: commission equipment 9400AWY, get 9400AWY Rel.1.0 Lineup Guide (Ref.[C] on page 281) and proceed as specified by it 9400FSO, get 9400FSO Rel.1.0 Lineup Guide (REF.[G] on page 283) and proceed as specified by it
update ECT and equipment with a newer SWP version (same SWP release)
proceed as specified in chapter 13 on page 75
ECT SOFTWARE USAGE FOR EQUIPMENT SW MANAGEMENT have an overview on menu tree structure manage equipment configuration setup parameters for maintenance (configure housekeeping alarms; configure the Alarms Management, access the Alarm Surveillance and show the alarm condition). access the Events Log file use of the Performance Monitoring functionalities continues .. open SECTION 2 AWY/FSO NE MANAGEMENT on page 77 of this handbook and then search the information according to the listed topics
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 19 / 296
.. continues If you need immediate operative information on how to:

9400AWY MAINTENANCE provision and manage spare parts carry out preventive maintenance get 9400AWY Technical Handbook (Ref. [A] on page 281) and read its QUICK GUIDE (same topic)
get 9400AWY Technical Handbook (Ref. [A] on page 281), and go to its section MAINTENANCE, chapter Second Level Maintenance paragraph Corrective Maintenance and proceed as specified; in any case, such section will usually lead to the SECTION 3 AWY/FSO NE MAINTENANCE on page 215 of this handbook. carry out corrective maintenance Alternatively, access directly SECTION 3 AWY/FSO NE MAINTENANCE on page 215 of this handbook and proceed as specified; if a board must be replaced, you will be led to the use of paragraph Unit Replacement Procedures of the 9400AWY Technical Handbook for the correct replacing procedures. 9400FSO MAINTENANCE provision and manage spare parts carry out preventive maintenance get 9400FSO Technical Handbook (Ref.[E] on page 283) and read its QUICK GUIDE (same topic)
get 9400FSO Technical Handbook (Ref.[E] on page 283), and go to its section MAINTENANCE, chapter Second Level Maintenance paragraph Corrective Maintenance and proceed as specified; in any case, such section will usually lead to the SECTION 3 AWY/FSO NE MAINTENANCE on page 215 of this handbook. carry out corrective maintenance Alternatively, access directly SECTION 3 AWY/FSO NE MAINTENANCE on page 215 of this handbook and proceed as specified; if a board must be replaced, you will be led to the use of paragraph Unit Replacement Procedures of the 9400FSO Technical Handbook for the correct replacing procedures.
To find any other kind of information not listed in the above table, please refer to the TABLE OF CONTENTS of this handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 20 / 296
SECTION 1: INSTALLATION
SECTION CONTENT Chapter 11 SWP installation in PC environment This chapter details all phases necessary to install for the first time a SWP in the PC environment or to upgrade it with a new version of the same SWP. Chapter 12 SWP download toward NE This chapter details all phases necessary to install for the first time a SWP in the equipment environment. Chapter 13 NE Upgrade to a newer SWP version (same SWP release) This chapter details all phases necessary to install a new SWP version in the PC environment as well as in the equipment environment.
PAGE 23
59
75
The symbol
points out references to Other Handbooks.
Referenced handbook P/Ns are given in para.E.2 on page 279.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 21 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
22 / 296
11 SWP INSTALLATION IN PC ENVIRONMENT

This chapter details all phases necessary to install for the first time a SWP in the PC environment or to upgrade it with a new version of the same SWP. Before starting the installation procedures, it is suggested to give a look to para.B.1 on page 252 and Appendix C on page 259. Procedures described in this chapter are carried out with the PC disconnected from the NE.
11.1 Requirements
11.1.1 PC characteristics For version V 1.0.0, V 1.0.1 & V 1.0.2 refer to paragraph 42.1 on page 231
11.1.2 Operator skills The operator shall be familiar with the use of personal computers in WINDOWSNT / WINDOWS 2000 / WINDOWS XP environment, internally to which the Network Elements application software operates. Furthermore, for a number of configuration applications, the operator shall be aware of some specifications of the International Standard Organization (ISO) and of the standards applied to the Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) (ITUT Recommandations).
11.2 Summary of SW installation phases

The sequence of installation phases for the SWP loading in PC WINDOWSNT/XP/2000 environment (PC is disconnected from Equipment Controller) are as follows: a) Installation from SWP CDROM 1) 2) 3) b) installation of 1320CT + NE software from SWP CDROM installation of SIBDL program from SWP CDROM end of SW installation from SWP CDROM
CT initial configuration
that are described in detail in following paragraphs.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 23 / 296
11.3 SWP loading in PC WINDOWSNT/2000/XP environment

Procedures described in the following are carried out with the PC disconnected from the NE.
11.3.1 Installation of 1320CT + NE software from SWP CDROM This operation must be perfoms at Administrator of the PC, because it subsequently could be to set IP address . Hereafter are described the SWP installation procedures to be used for: First installation The first time this SWP is installed on the PC, follow this procedure: 1) 2) 3) First install the Java and LLMan components by using the guided installation mode, described in the para. 11.3.1.1 CT Products installation guided. Second configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card by using the procedure described in the para. 11.3.1.2 Alcatel Virtual Network Card configuration. At the end install the other components, by using the automatic installation mode, described in the para. 11.3.1.3 CT Products automatic installation.
Complete updating To update one or more components on the PC, follow this procedure: 1) 2) To update the Java and LLMan components use the guided installation mode, described in the para. 11.3.1.1 CT Products installation guided. To update the other components use the automatic installation mode, described in the para. 11.3.1.3 CT Products automatic installation.
Partial automatic updating To update one or more components, excluded Java and LLMan, use only the automatic installation mode, described in the para. 11.3.1.3 CT Products automatic installation.
WARNING:
During the installation an ALCATEL directory is automatically created, if not already present. If ALCATEL directory is already present on the PC, for a correct operation of the FTP server, this directory must have all upper case characters (i.e. ALCATEL).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 24 / 296
11.3.1.1 CT Products installation guided In the following is described (step by step) the procedure to install JRE and Alcatel Lower Layer Manager with the CT Products installation guided.
Operations sequence: Step 1. Select the CT Products installation guided and press NEXT button.
Step 2. Select JRE (ONLY if you have an OLDER version) and Alcatel Lower Layer Manager components. WARNING: if try to update JRE and JRE V 1.4.1 is already installed, the procedure automatically deinstall, it WITHOUT making the new installation. Keep attention in this case to the Question Window that appears, which ask you to proceed to the deinstallation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 25 / 296
Step 3. Press NEXT button to execute the installation of the previously selected components.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Step 4. Press NEXT button to start the installation of the Lower Layers Manager.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 26 / 296
Step 5. Select Configure Lower Layer and press FINISH button to complete the operation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Step 6. Complete the configuration and press OK button. N.B. If a network adapter is not running in the PC, you can set the System identifierfield with a sequence of 12 0. The following window will be displayed.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 27 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Step 9. Press YES button to confirm.
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
28 / 296
11.3.1.2 Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers At first SWP installation on ECT, after installation of Alcatel Lower Layer Manager and before the installation of other ECT SW components, it is necessary, for NE connection using TCP/IP through serial port, to configure a Virtual Network Card. Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is a software component used by Alcatel Lower Layers Manager to manage TCP/IP packets through the serial port. Follow this guide to install and configure Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers using the Control Panel. Refer to para. 11.3.1.2.1 on page 29 for intallation on Windows NT 4.0; refer to para. 11.3.1.2.2 on page 35 for intallation on Windows 2000; refer to para. 11.3.1.2.3 on page 43 for intallation on Windows XP. 11.3.1.2.1 Windows NT 4.0 11.3.1.2.1.1 Installing the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers select the Adapters tab in the Network Control Panel applet. After installing Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to configure it following the instruction of the Windows NT 4.0: Configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers section. Before installing Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install TCP/IP protocol (please refer to Windows NT Help). Click the Add... button in the Adapter tab of the Network Control Panel applet.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 1. Windows NT installation step 1
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 29 / 296
In the Insert Disk dialog box, type the source path of the driver files copied during installation phase (e.g. C:\WinNT\System32\Drivers\LLmanNIC; type echo %systemroot% from a Command Prompt window to discover the right location of the WinNT folder) and click OK.
Fig. 2. Windows NT installation step 2 If the dialog box in Fig. 3. appears, the driver is already installed.
Fig. 3. Windows NT installation step 3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is now installed. You need to configure its TCP/IP parameters before use it in with Alcatel Lower Layers Manager.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 30 / 296
11.3.1.2.1.2 Configuring the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers To configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers use both the Bindings and the Protocols tabs in the Network Control Panel applet. Before configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install TCP/IP protocol (please refer to Windows NT Help). This operation must be perfoms at Administrator of the PC, because it subsequently could be to set IP address . To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Network Control Panel applet from the Control Panel. Select the bindings of Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers in the Bindings tab (1), (2) of the Network Control Panel applet. Disable any unneeded component (3), (4). Selecting the Protocols tab (5) of the Network Control Panel applet, the either a message box (Fig. 5. NT configuration step 2) or a dialog box (Fig. 6. NT configuration step 3) may appear. Follow the instrucions until the dialog box (Fig. 7. NT configuration step 4) will appear.
2 3 4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 4. Windows NT configuration step 1
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 31 / 296
Click Yes to save changes.
Fig. 5. Windows NT configuration step 2 Select Protocols tab (1), TCP/IP Protocol (2) and click the Properties button (3).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 32 / 296
Configure the IP Address and the Subnet Mask for the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers and push OK.
3 4
*** WARNING *** If the IP Address of the Virtual Network Card has been changed after a complete SWP installation, it is necessary, for a correct ECT functionality, to perform an explicit ECT recustomization by executing the following command: Start Programs Alcatel SNMPCTKADDON v... SNMP AddOn Customization
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 33 / 296
Click Close in the Protocols tab of the Network Control Panel applet.
Fig. 8. Windows NT configuration step 5 The new configuration of Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers will be used at the next restart of the computer. If you are configuring or installing the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you can click Yes. If you are installing some other component you should click No and restart the computer later.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 34 / 296
11.3.1.2.2 Windows 2000 11.3.1.2.2.1 Installing the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers
To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard from the Control Panel. Before installing and configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install TCP/IP protocol (please refer to Windows 2000 Help). Please make sure of Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is not already installed on your PC: Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers has to be installed only once. After installing Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to configure it following the instruction of the Windows 2000: Configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers section. Click the Next button in the Welcome to the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard dialog box.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 10. Windows 2000 installation step 1
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 35 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
36 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Click the Have Disk... button in the Select Network Adapter dialog box.
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
37 / 296
In the Install From Disk dialog box, type the source path of the driver files copied during installation phase (e.g. C:\WinNT\System32\Drivers\LLmanNIC; type echo %systemroot% from a Command Propt window to discover the right location of the WinNT folder) and click OK.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 38 / 296
Click Next in the Start Hardware Installation dialog box.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 14. Windows 2000 installation step 5 Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is now installed. You need to configure its TCP/IP parameters before use it in with Alcatel Lower Layers Manager.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 39 / 296
11.3.1.2.2.2 Configuring the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers This operation must be perfoms at Administrator of the PC, because it subsequently could be to set IP address . To configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Network and Dialup connections applet from the Control Panel. Before installing and configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install TCP/IP protocol (please refer to Windows 2000 Help). To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard from the Control Panel. Open the network connection using the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers from the Network and Dialup connections applet.
Fig. 15. Windows 2000 configuration step 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 40 / 296
Uncheck any unneeded component in the Properties dialog box General tab (1). Check and select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) component (2) and click Properties (3).
1 2 3
Fig. 16. Windows 2000 configuration step 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 41 / 296
Configure the IP Address (1) and the Subnet Mask (2) and push OK (3).
1 2
Fig. 17. Windows 2000 configuration step 3 Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is now configured. You need Alcatel Lower Layers Manager to use it. *** WARNING *** If the IP Address of the Virtual Network Card has been changed after a complete SWP installation, it is necessary, for a correct ECT functionality, to perform an explicit ECT recustomization by executing the following command: Start Programs Alcatel SNMPCTKADDON v... SNMP AddOn Customization
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 42 / 296
11.3.1.2.3 Windows XP 11.3.1.2.3.1 Installing the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers
To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Add Hardware Wizard from the Control Panel. After installing Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to configure it following the instruction of the Windows XP: Configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers section. Please make sure of Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is not already installed on your PC: Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers has to be installed only once. Click the Next button in the Welcome to the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard dialog box.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 43 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
Fig. 18. Windows XP installation step 1
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
44 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
45 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Click the Have Disk... button in the Select Network Adapter dialog box. Fig. 20. Windows XP installation step 3
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
46 / 296
In the Install From Disk dialog box, type the source path of the driver files copied during installation phase (e.g. C:\WinNT\System32\Drivers\LLmanNIC; type echo %systemroot% from a Command Propt window to discover the right location of the WinNT folder) and click OK.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 47 / 296
Click Next in the The wizard is ready to install your hardware dialog box.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is now installed. You need to configure its TCP/IP parameters before use it in with Alcatel Lower Layers Manager.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 48 / 296
11.3.1.2.3.2 Configuring the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers This operation must be perfoms at Administrator of the PC, because it subsequently could be to set IP address . To configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Network connections applet from the Control Panel. To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard from the Control Panel. Open the network connection using the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers from the Network and Dialup connections applet.
Fig. 23. Windows XP configuration step 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 49 / 296
Uncheck any unneeded component (disable always the QoS Packet Scheduler 1 ) in the Properties dialog box General tab. Check and select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) component (2) and click Properties (3).
1 2 3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 50 / 296
Configure the IP Address (1) and the Subnet Mask (2) and Advanced option (3) and then push OK (4).
1 2
3 4
*** WARNING *** If the IP Address of the Virtual Network Card has been changed after a complete SWP installation, it is necessary, for a correct ECT functionality, to perform an explicit ECT recustomization by executing the following command: Start Programs Alcatel SNMPCTKADDON v... SNMP AddOn Customization
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 51 / 296
Configure the Advanced TCP/IP Settings dialog box select the WINS sheet (1), Disable NetBIOS over TCP/IP (2) and then push OK (3).
3
Fig. 26. Windows XP configuration step 4 Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is now configured. You need Alcatel Lower Layers Manager to use it.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 52 / 296
11.3.1.3 CT Products installation guided Hereafter is described the procedure to install all the components except JRE and Alcatel Lower Layer Manager with the CT Products automatic installation Operations sequence: Step 1. Select the CT Products automatic installation and press NEXT button.
Step 2. Select all components except JRE and Alcatel Lower Layer Manager.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Step 3. Press NEXT button to execute the installation of the previously selected components.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 53 / 296
11.3.2 Installation of SIBDL program from SWP CDROM Refer to chapter B.1 for general information on SIBDL program (in particular point 2 ) in para.B.3.2 on page 257 and point 2 ) in para.C.1 on page 260). The SIBDL program is not automatically installed by the autoinstallation process. The installation of SIBDL is detailed in the dedicated Section of the: 9400AWY Line Up Guide or 9400FSO Line Up Guide N.B. It is not mandatory to install SIBDL in this phase. You can postpone it when necessary (take into account that you will need the SWP CDROM).
11.3.3 End of SW installation from SWP CDROM Having reached this phase, you have finished the Software transfer from SWP CDROM to the PC environment. Now, you can extract the SWP CDROM from the PCs CDROM unit.
11.3.4 Deinstallation phases This paragraph describes how deinstall from the PC the Software Package required by the Craft Terminal to manage the relevant Network Element. This can be useful, for example, when a version of the software package is no more updated. To deinstall the following procedure can be followed: with the CDROM containing the relevant Software product. with the Control Panel of WINDOWS NT or WINDOWS 2000/XP when the CDROM containing the relevant Software product is not present.
From Control Panel select Add/Remove Programmes and deinstall the components shown in the following figure.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 54 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
Fig. 27. Deinstallation
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
55 / 296
11.4 CT initial configuration

Procedures described in the following are carried out with the PC disconnected from the NE.
11.4.1 Craft Terminal configuration This procedure is necessary to configure the PC in order to manage the Network Elements and includes the following types of configuration: PC hostname CT configuration Communication Protocol (TCP/IP): TCP/IP without a network card TCP/IP with a network card Switching between the two configurations
Serial Communication with the NE Screen settings
In order to setup these configurations, refer to: 1320CT Basic Craft Terminal Operators Handbook , section INSTALLATION, chapter Craft Terminal Configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 56 / 296
11.4.2 Craft Terminal connection to the NE The CT can be connected to the NE through the Serial Port or through the Ethernet Network Port.
Only one connection can be active. The default connection is the Serial port.
11.4.2.1 Connection through the Serial Port This connection is the default connection. To connect the CT to the NE through the Serial Port: 1) The Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers Software has to be installed on the PC (refer to para. 11.3.1.2 on page 29). If the IP Address configured for the Alcatel Virtual Card has been changed after the 1320CT Platform installation, it is necessary to perform a recustomization by entering the following command:
N.B.
Start Programs Alcatel SNMPCTKADDON v.3.1.x SNMP AddOn Customization
N.B.
If the connection through Ethernet Network Port has been activated, to activate again the connection through the Serial Port enter the following command:
Start Programs Alcatel SNMPCTKADDON v.3.1.x NE Connection Serial Port
11.4.2.2 Connection through the Ethernet Network Port 1) 2) 3) 4) Configure the Network Card on the CT as explained in the 1320CT Basic Craft Terminal Operators Handbook. Enter the NE and enable the Ethernet port on the NE (refer to para. 22.2.2 on page 92). Quit the NE and close the Network Element Synthesis application. Activate the CT Connection through the Ethernet Port by the following command:
StartProgramsAlcatelSNMPCTKADDON v.3.1.xNE ConnectionEthernet Port
N.B.
If the IP Address configured on the Ethernet port has been changed, it is necessary to perform a recustomization by entering the following commands: Start Programs Alcatel CTK v.3.1.x Customization Start Programs Alcatel SNMPCTKADDON v.3.1.x NE ConnectionEthernet Port
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Start Programs Alcatel SNMPCTKADDON v.3.1.x SNMP AddOn Customization
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 57 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
58 / 296
12 SWP DOWNLOAD TOWARD NE

This chapter details all phases necessary to install for the first time a SWP in the equipment environment.
Before starting the installation procedures, it is suggested to give a look to para.B.1 on page 252 and Appendix C on page 259. Procedures described in this chapter are carried out with the PC connected to the NE.
12.1 Requirements
12.1.1 NE hardware The equipment must have been already physically installed, cabled and powered on, according to the instructions given in the: 9400AWY Installation Handbook or 9400FSO Installation Handbook
12.1.2 Craft Terminal The Craft Terminal, already loaded with the SWP to be downloaded toward the NE (N.B.), must be available together with the cable for its connection to the equipment F interface. N.B. as explained in previous chapter 11 on page 23.
12.1.3 Operator skills and profile In addition to skills stated in para.11.1.2 on page 23, the Operator must be familiar with all the equipment functionalities.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 59 / 296
12.2 Summary of the SWP installation phases

The installation phases are: a) b) c) d) SW download to the NE, para.12.3 herebelow NE Login, para.12.4 on page 72 Commissioning, para.12.5 on page 73 Configuration data definition, para.12.6 on page 73
12.3 SW download to the NE

Through the suitable cable, connect the ECT to the F interface of the MAIN unit (see Fig. 157. on page 251). N.B. The software download can be performed also by using the Ethernet interface of the PC. The ECT must be connected to the Ethernet interface of the MAIN unit (see Fig. 157. on page 251). To activate the Ethernet connection refer to para. 11.4.2.2 on page 57. In this case the download will last only few minutes. Start the ECT Start Alcatel 1320CT Install the current SWP on the platform environment On NES (Network Element Synthesis) start SWP Administrator: Supervision Files Administration (SWP Administrator)
Step 1. Step 2.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 60 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
On SWP Administrator windows press install bottom Browse the SWP file descriptor R94a.dsc from the disk (C:\ALCATEL\JUSMw0.1.5\ect\swdw\R94AWY\1.0.0)
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
61 / 296
Step 3.
Start Supervision On NES (Network Element Synthesis) start Supervision: Supervision Start
Step 4.
Show Equipment On NES (Network Element Synthesis) start Show Equipment: Supervision Show Equipment
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 62 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Step 5.
03 Setup Server Access Configuration
On JUSM start Server Access Configuration: SW Download Server Access Configuration
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
63 / 296
In the FTP Login window the field Address must be set with the same address written in Alcatel Lower Layer Manager IP Network Local address. Press OK to confirm.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 64 / 296
Use System Default botton When the operator click the Use System Default botton is possibile to set the field ADDRESS in two different mode: 1) 2) by F interface: to set IP address of the LLMAN to download in interface IF mode by LAN interface: to set IP address of the PC to download the software in LAN mode
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 65 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Step 6. Init SW Download Wait List Sw Package creation ...
03
On JUSM start Init SW Download: SW Download Init SW Download
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
66 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
When action is completed, press Enter to close message window.
03
Now select a specific SWP to download on the NE, and press Init download to start it.
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
67 / 296
Confirm the start of software downloading:
The software downloading in progress is shown by a specific window:
When the download is over the following window is shown:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 68 / 296
Step 7.
Activation of the new Software Package on the NE On JUSM start SW Download: SW Download SW Download.
After the software download, two software packages are present in the NE: one Committed and the other Stand by. The NE Software Status Detail window shows the information.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 69 / 296
To activate the new software package select the software package in Stand by Status.
Now select on Software Management Action field Activation.
Press Apply Action.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 70 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Confirm the selected action. After this window the NE restarts with the new software package.
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
71 / 296
12.4 NE Login
a) Cable connection Through the suitable cable connect the ECT to the F interface or to the Ethernet interface of the MAIN unit (refer to Fig. 157. on page 251). To activate on the CT the connection through the Serial Port or through the Ethernet Port refer to para. 11.4.2 on page 57. b) Craft Terminal (CT) startup 1) CT start : power on the CT and wait for PC startup Start Alcatel 1320CT: if choice Alcatel 1320CT is not available, PC is not configured as Craft Terminal: Software Package loading is necessary
after a while, the Network Element Synthesis screen will appear, showing all Network Elements that can be selected. After this Start operation, all NEs appear with symbol ? (it means they are not supervised) N.B. For a corrected operation, only on some PC with Windows 2000 or XP by using the serial connection, it is necessary to start the Lower Layers Manager (Start Programs Alcatel Lower Layers Lower Layers Manager) before starting the ECT Platform (Alcatel 1320CT).
c)
Start supervision on a selected Network Element (NE) From screen Network Element Synthesis ( see point b ) 1 ) ) : 1) select the interested Network Element (NE) clicking once left mouse button on it; N.B. During the creation of the SNMP NE (refer to the 1320CT Basic Craft Terminal Operators Handbook, section 5 EML CONSTRUCTION), in the TCP/IP Port field number 161 must be inserted.
2)
while NE selected, with right mouse button choose Start Supervision and with left mouse button execute it (click once). Wait until the symbol ? becomes colored (it means NE in supervised state) N.B. The User Label of the NE must not include the following characters: \ ? : * < > |.
WARNING: Due to a deep fading the radio remote NE can be unreachable. In this condition in the USM will appear the following message:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 72 / 296
The USM must be closed. In the NES will appear a broken icon and a red bullet.
d)
Wait for the automatic restarting of the Supervision (at the end of the fading conditions). The icon in NES will become whole and the bullet will take the color relevant to the alarms (if any) active in the NE. If the Supervision does not start, close and open again the CT. If the Supervision does not start, switch off and switch on the PC. Network Element login From screen Network Element Synthesis with NE in supervised state ( see point c ) 2 ) ): 1) 2) select the interested Network Element (NE) clicking once right mouse button on it; select Show Equipment. All the available menus are explained in Section 2.
WARNING: Before disconnecting the F interface cable or before switching off the NE, stop the supervision and close the JUSM.
12.5 Commissioning
The commissioning instructions are given in: 9400AWY Line Up Guide or 9400FSO Line Up Guide
12.6 Configuration data definition

The instructions given in the handbook cited in para. 12.5 above may not include the definition of all the Equipment configuration data that could be necessary. In order to manage this data, refer to the Section 2 AWY/FSO NE MANAGEMENT on page 77.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 73 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
74 / 296
13 NE UPGRADE TO A NEWER SWP VERSION (SAME SWP RELEASE)

This chapter details all phases necessary to install a new SWP version in the PC environment as well as in the equipment environment. This procedure can be used only in the case depicted in point 3 ) on page 261, i.e.: ECT and equipment are running with one of the Software Packages with P/N indicated in Tab. 16. on page 229 and with generic version A.B.c (A.B is the SW release, c is the patch level) a new version of SWP A.B.d (d > c), having the same P/N, is delivered to Customer.
Procedure: 1) 2) 3) Requirements: see para.11.1 on page 23 and para.12.1 on page 59. Carry out the installation of the new SWP version in the ECT environment, as indicated in chapter 11 on page 23. The subsequent phases depend on the compatibility of MIB structure between previous and new SWP versions. This MIB compatibility is indicated in the suitable chapterparagraph (according to SWP Version) in Section 4 on page 227. In case you receive a version higher than the highest listed on page 227, please refer to the documentation accompanying the SWP delivery to get this information. N.B. 4) Usually the MIB structure is fully compatible inside a SWP Release, so that the following step 4 ) must be taken into consideration.
new MIB structure compatible with old MIB structure: a) perform the SW download with the following Craft Terminal commands (refer to para.213.2 on page 212 for detailed description): N.B. b) perform step 1 to 5 in para. 12.3 on page 60 SW Download Init SW download the screen of Fig. 148. on page 212 opens select the new NEversion to be downloaded with SWP Version 1.0.1 and 1.0.2 is necessary to select Forced option on CT screen for SW Download activation request click on Init download button then, after about 1/2 hour, SW Download SW status Apply Action to activate the software. The software download can be performed also by using the Ethernet interface of the PC. In this case the download lasts only few minutes.
perform NE logoff followed by NE login.
The result is the Equipment working with the new SWP version nevertheless maintaining the old configuration data.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
5)
new MIB structure not compatible with old MIB structure Procedure presently not necessary.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 75 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
76 / 296
SECTION 2: AWY/FSO NE MANAGEMENT

SECTION CONTENT
PAGE 79
Chapter 21 General introduction on views and menus This chapter describes the organization of the 9400AWY/FSO ULS N.E., presented after the NE login. EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT Chapter 22 Configuration This chapter describes the configuration relevant to the equipment management. Chapter 23 Equipment This chapter deals with the presentation of the N.E. and the structure of the hierarchical tree, and the types of subracks and boards, that comprise the Network Element. Chapter 24 Line Interface This chapter describes the operations necessary for the configuration setting and verification of each tributary. Chapter 25 Radio This chapter deals with the management of the Radio transmission features. Chapter 26 FSO This chapter deals with the management of the FSO transmission features. Chapter 27 External input and output points This chapter describes how to display and set the input/output environmental alarms (housekeeping alarms). FUNCTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE Chapter 28 Supervision This chapter describes how to manage the NE access from OS or local ECT and how to restart the NE. Chapter 29 Protection schemes This chapter deals with the management of the Radio protections. Chapter 210 Loopbacks This chapter describes the commands for loopback management, for commissioning or maintenane purposes. Chapter 211 Diagnosis This chapter describes how to access the Alarm and Event Log files and explains the Summary Block Diagram View menu. N.B. The chapter does not describe the Log Browser. Reference must be done to the specific ELB Operators Handbook. Chapter 212 Performance Monitoring This chapter deals with the use of the Performance Monitoring functionalities. SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT Chapter 213 Software Management This chapter deals with the management of the functions related to the software verification/download and to the backup and restore of equipment configuration data.
89
127
137 143 153 163
167 171 181
195
201
211
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 77 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
78 / 296
21 GENERAL INTRODUCTION ON VIEWS AND MENUS

This chapter describes the organization of the 9400 AWY/FSO N.E., presented after the NE login.
First the view organization is introduced, then the accessible menu options are listed. Some further advices are given for Navigation principles. N.B. This operator handbook explains the menus for Rel.1.0.0, Rel.1.0.1 and Rel. 1.0.2. Version 1.0.0 manages the Radio application only (1+0 configuration). Versions 1.0.1 and 1.0.2 manage the Radio application (1+0, 1+1 and 1+0 EXP configurations) and the FSO application.
21.1 9400 AWY/FSO view organization

The 9400 AWY/FSO view ( see Fig. 28. on page 80 ) contains the following fields, which provide the operator with the information needed to manage the NE: Severity alarm synthesis, Domain alarm synthesis, Management status control panel, View title, View area, Message/state area.
The Menu bar and the View area contained in the same NE view permit to perform all configuration and supervision operations and the display the specific selected item. The view organization is detailed in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator Handbook to which refer for the description. N.B. Fig. 28. on page 80 shows the 9400 AWY in 1+1 configuration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 79 / 296
Severity alarm synthesis Menu bar Main tool bar
Domain alarm synthesis

View area
Management state control panel
Fig. 28. 9400 AWY Main view organization N.B. For the meaning of the icons in the Severity alarm synthesis, Domain alarm synthesis and the Management state control panel refer to Section 3 paragraph Alarm synthesis indication in this handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 80 / 296
21.1.1 View Area The View Area manages all domains from which the user can start. It is organized into tabbed panel, e.g. many windows placed one upon another. Each window is selectable (placing it on top of the others) with a tab shown on the top. Each panel represents a set of functions. The area consist of the following sets: Equipment External Points Line Interface Performance Radio (or FSO in V 1.0.1 and V 1.0.2) Protection Schemes (for Radio application only in V 1.0.1 and V 1.0.2) Loopback Sw Download
The following figure shows the tabbed panel organization. Each tab panel is labeled with the set name ( e.g. Equipment, Line Interface, etc ).
RESOURCE TREE AREA
RESOURCE LIST AREA
RESOURCE DETAIL AREA
Fig. 29. View Areas

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 81 / 296
Each tabpanel (e.g. functionalities area) consists of four areas: ResourceTree Area: displays all the available resources of the Radio NE.
ResourceList Area: may be represented by: Tabular View (e.g., Line Interface Domain) or Graphical View (e.g., Equipment Domain). Tabular View: displays a tabular representation of the selected resource. As default, no tabular element is shown. Graphical View: displays a graphical representation of the selected resource. As default, no tabular element is shown.
ResourceDetail Area: displays detailed information of a selected item in the Resource List area. As a default, no entry view is displayed as a consequence of the default behavior of the Resource List area.
21.1.2 Resource Tree Area The Resource Area displays all the available resources in a tree structure like the protocol stack hierarchy. The below figure shows an example of the resource tree instance (for the Line Interface functions):
Fig. 30. Resource tree area
21.1.2.1 Selection Criteria Each tree node consists of two symbols. The first symbol indicates the state of the structure e.g., if the symbol is + the tree can be expanded to a lower level. The tree structure can be collapsed if the symbol is . Finally, if there is no symbol, the node represents a leaf. The second symbol is the graphical representation of the resource. The user must select the resource by clicking with the mouse to carry out an action that depends on the type of click.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Each resource listed above may be selected by using the mouse by a: Single left click; Double left click 03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 82 / 296
ED
Single left click: By a single left click the resource is highlighted. This selection causes the activation of the resource list area, e.g., every time the user selects a resource in the resource tree area the corresponding Tabular or Graphical representation is displayed in the Resource list area . Double left click: Using this type of selection on the items of the resource tree, the user can expand the tree structure and activate the Resource list area displaying the same information described above. When the tree node is expanded a double click will collapsethe tree node showing the same information in the Resource list area.
21.1.3 Resource Detail Area This area displays the detailed information of the selected object in the Resource list area. It also provides the types of operations available
21.1.4 Button Policy The possible buttons for selection are the following: Apply Cancel OK Close Help this button activates the modify, but it does not close the window. this button closes the window without modifying the parameters displayed in the window. this button activates the modify and closes the window this button closes the window this button provides the help management for the functions of the supporting window.
Critical configuration choices should require a warning message for user confirmation before to be activated.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 83 / 296
21.2 Introduction to the menu options

The menu bar allows to perform configuration and supervision functions on the Network Element. This paragraph lists all menu options and then provides more details on the respective contained entries. For each of them the relevant operative function are briefly introduced and it is referred the paragraphs where they are detailed or the introduction to the options of each menu inserted in next paragraphs of this chapter. From Chapter 22 on page 89 details and operating information on all views are given. In the menu bar, a number of permanent menu items are always displayed. Starting from the left, the menus are: Permanent Menus Views (first column). See para.21.2.1 on page 85.
To navigate among the views and to set the TMN parameters. Configuration (second column). See para.21.2.2 on page 87.
To set the general configuration of the NE and to show or modify some parameters (performance monitoring, OverHead parameters). Diagnosis (third column). See para.21.2.3 on page 87.
To get information on the NE (alarms, performance monitoring, remote inventory). Supervision (fourth column). See para.21.2.4 on page 88.
To set the supervision states (i.e. Craft Terminal enabling). SW Download (fifth column). See para. 21.2.5 on page 88.
To manage the NE software (download, MIB management). Help (last column).
To activate the help on line. The menu bar also comprises other menus, presented only when a specific option is selected. Other Menus Equipment This menu is present only when the Equipment menu (selected in the View menu or in the Equipment tab panel) is active. It allows to go back to the supporting equipment of the displayed object.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 84 / 296
21.2.1 Views menu introduction The menu on the left side of the screen, allows to navigate among the views and to set some parameters, by means of the following entries: Previous: Open Object: Open in New Window: Duplicate View in New Window: Equipment: Goes back to the previous screen of the application. Not active. Not active. Not active. Opens the Equipment view. Then the Equipment menu is available on the menu bar. See Chapter 23 on page 127. Displays and sets the input/output environmental alarm. See Chapter 27 on page 163. Opens the Line Interface view to configure all the tributary ports. See Chapter 24 on page 137. Allows to manage the Performance monitoring. See Chapter 212 on page 201. Allows to manage all the functions relevant to the radio channels. See Chapter 25 on page 143. Allows to manage all the functions relevant to the FSO channel. See Chapter 26 on page 153. This menu is available in V 1.0.1 and V 1.0.2 only.
External Points: Line Interface: Performance: Radio: FSO:
Protection Scheme: Allows to manage the Protection schemes in 1+1 configuration. See Chapter 29 on page 171. This menu is available in V 1.0.1 and V 1.0.2 only for the Radio application. Loopback: Allows to manage the loopbacks available with the equipment. See Chapter 210 on page 181.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 85 / 296
N.B.
It is possible to enter directly menus Equipment, External Points, Line Interface, Performance, Radio ( or FSO ), Protection Scheme, Loopback by clicking on the relevant tab panel above the view area. Refer to Fig. 31. on page 86. Tab panel
Fig. 31. Tab panels
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 86 / 296
21.2.2 Configuration menu introduction This menu allows to set the general configuration of the NE and to show or modify some parameters, by means of the following entries: NE Time: Network configuration: Alarm Severities: System setting: Quick configuration: Displays and set the NE local time. See para. 22.1 on page 89. See para. 22.2 on page 90. Manages the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile. See para. 22.3 on page 101. Allows the system configuration, providing the setting of all the parameters for the NE setup. See para. 22.4 on page 106. Allows a full system configuration through a guided procedure. See para. 22.5 on page 113.
21.2.3 Diagnosis menu introduction This menu allows to get information on the NE, by means of the following entries: Log Browsing: Manages the events stored in the NE. Opens the following menu options: Alarm log Event log Software Trace log See para. 211.1 on page 195.
Current configuration View: Displays the current configuration of the NE. See para. 211.2 on page 195. Summary Block Diagram View: Displays a global logical view (strictly related to the physical implementation) highlighting a synthesis of all the alarms and statuses present in the system (ODU+IDU). See para. 211.4 on page 196. Displays the manually operations active in the NE.
Abnormal condition list:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 87 / 296
21.2.4 Supervision menu introduction This menu allows to set the supervision states of the NE, by means of the following entries (see chapter 28 on page 167) : Access State: Manages the supervision access to the NE, via CT or OS. Opens the following menu options: OS Requested See para. 28.1 on page 167. Reset of the NE software. See para. 28.2 on page 168. Displays the type of the key stored in the flash card. See para. 28.3 on page 169.
Restart NE: SW key:
21.2.5 Download menu introduction This menu allows to manage the NE software, by means of the following entries (see chapter 213 on page 211) : Server Access Configuration: Manages the configuration of the FTP server to be used for the software download to the NE. See para. 213.1 on page 211.
Initi SW download: Manages the software download to the NE. See para. 213.2 on page 212. SW status: Shows and manages the status of the software packages installed in the NE memory banks. See para. 213.3 on page 213.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 88 / 296
22 CONFIGURATION 22.1 NE Time

The NE local time can be displayed and/or realigned to the OS time basis. From the Configuration pull down menu, select the NE Time option. The following dialogue box opens, from which you can set the local NE time.
Fig. 32. NE Time dialogue box The NE Time dialogue box displays the current NE time and the current OS time. To realign the NE time to the OS time, click on the Set NE Time With OS Time check box and click the Apply pushbutton to validate. With a click on the Daylight Saving Time (DST) check box the manual management of the summer time takes place. The Refresh pushbutton allows to read the time actually present in the NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 89 / 296
22.2 Network Configuration

To get access the Network Configuration option select the Configuration pull down menu, as shown in the following figure.
Fig. 33. Network Configuration menu
The Network Configuration allows to perform the following operations: Local Configuration: Ethernet Configuration: IP Configuration defines the local NE addresses defines the configuration parameters necessary to manage the local NE providing a LAN Ethernet interface which comprises:
IP static routing configuration: defines the Host/Network destination address for IP static routing OSPF Area configuration: IP Address configuration of PointToPoint Interfaces : Routing information defines the Open Shortest Path First address defines the IP address of the interface which use the PPP protocol shows a summary of the information relevant to the routing which has been configured.
The options are described in next paragraphs.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 90 / 296
22.2.1 Local Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu.

Select the Network Configuration option and then, from the cascading menu, the Local Configuration option. The dialogue box opens ( see Fig. 34. on page 91 ) which allows to configure the local IP address of the NE. This local IP address is the IP address associated to the F interface and to the other interfaces which use the PPP protocol (the 3 NMS channels). Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialogue box and closes it; the dialogue is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. Close button closes the dialogue. Help button provides some useful information on the dialogue.
Fig. 34. Local Configuration dialogue box
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 91 / 296
22.2.2 Ethernet Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu.

Select the Network Configuration option and then, from the cascading menu, the Ethernet Configuration option. The dialogue box in Fig. 35. on page 92 opens, which allows to define the parameters necessary to configure the Ethernet interface. The following areas are present: IP Section which comprises: IP Address to be assigned to the N.E. IP Mask relevant to the IP address IP Routing Protocol can be only in None state.If OSPF or Both options of Routing IP Protocol field are selected, also the Associated OSPF Area must be set. OSPF Area poiner: if as IP Routing Protocol the OSPF protocol has been selected it is possible to create OSPF areas.
Enable which comprises two selections to Enable or Disable the Ethernet interface.
Refresh button refresh the information written in the upper port. Apply button performs a configuration change of the data. Close button closes the dialog without changes of the data.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 35. Ethernet Configuration dialogue box
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 92 / 296
22.2.3 IP Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Network Configuration and then from the cascading menu, the IP Configuration option ( see Fig. 36. on page 93).
Fig. 36. IP configuration screen
22.2.3.1 IP static routing configuration The dialogbox opens ( see Fig. 37. on page 94 ) and allows to configure the parameters for IP Static Routing Configuration. The following fields and data are present: [1] [2] [3] [4] IP Address: IP Mask: Default Gateway IP Address: Interface type: allows to define the IP address necessary to reach a specific Host allows to define the IP Mask to reach a network allows to define the address of the next hop gateway allows to use point to point interfaces made available by the NE.
Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete table and close the view; the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. New button is used to insert a new page. Delete button is used to delete the selected page. Close button closes the dialogue without changing of the data.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 93 / 296
Fig. 37. IP static routing configuration screen
By pressing Create pushbutton the screen in Fig. 38. on page 95 opens. In the Host or Network Address Choice field select: Host to address to a single IP address; Network to address to a range of IP addresses.
In the Default Gateway or Point to Point I/F Choice select:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Default Gateway IP Address for the Ethernet interface; Point to Point Interface Index for the NMS channels (NMSRF, NMSV11, NMSG703)
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 94 / 296
Fig. 38. Create Static routing
If in the screen of Fig. 38. on page 95 the Default Gateway IP Address check box has been selected, write in the Default Gateway IP Address field below the relevant IP address. If in screen in Fig. 38. on page 95 has been selected the Point To Point Interface Index check box, the screen in Fig. 39. on page 96 opens.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 95 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Fig. 39. Point To Point Interface Choice
03
In this screen one of the 3 NMS channels (NMSRF, NMSV11, NMSG703) can be selected.
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
96 / 296
22.2.3.2 OSPF Area configuration The dialogbox opens ( see Fig. 40. on page 97 ) and allows to configure the parameters for OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) Area Table Configuration. The following fields and data are present: OSPF Area IP Address OSPF Area Range Mask OSPF Area Stub
The fields give a synthetical information that includes all the addresses (specific to a NE and to a Network) in an Area. Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete RAP table and close the view; the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. New button is used to insert a new page. Delete button is used to delete the selected page. Close button closes the dialogue without changing of the data.
Fig. 40. OSPF Area configuration screen

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
WARNING: Area 0 is not managed. By pressing Create pushbutton the screen in Fig. 41. on page 98 opens. N.B. 3 areas max. can be created. 03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 97 / 296
ED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Fig. 41. Create New OSPF Area
03
In the screen write the IP address, the IP mask and select the flag (True/False).
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
98 / 296
22.2.3.3 IP Address configuration of PointToPoint Interfaces The dialogbox opens ( see Fig. 42. on page 99 ) and allows to Enable or Disable the three NMS channels, which use the PPP protocol. OK button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialogbox and closes it; the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data.
Fig. 42. IP Address configuration of PointToPoint Interfaces screen
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 99 / 296
22.2.4 Routing information Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Network Configuration and then from the cascading menu, the Routing information option. The dialogbox in Fig. 43. on page 100 opens.
Fig. 43. Routing information screen
This screen is a readonly screen and displays the routing parameters currently active on the NE. The pushbutton Refresh allows to refresh the information shown in the screen. The Close button closes the dialogue without changing of the data.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 100 / 296
22.3 Alarm Severities

By selecting the Alarm Severities option from the Configuration menu the screen in Fig. 44. on page 102 appears. In this screen in the Profile Name field are listed the 4 default Alarm Severity Profiles: Profile No Alarms. With this profile all alarms are disabled. Profile Primary Alarms. This profile enables the emission of the primary alarms. General rules used to define the alarms severity: MAJOR: the alarm affects the service (it is service affecting); MINOR or WARNING (according to the impact of the alarm): the alarm doesnt affects the service (with the exception of HighBER alarm, which MINOR alarm severity is defined, even if it is service affecting).
Profile No Remote Alarms. This profile enables the emission of the primary alarms plus EW and LBER alarm. This profile uses the following rules to define the alarms severity: MAJOR: the alarm affects the service (it is service affecting); MINOR: the alarm is potentially service affecting but a protection has recovered the service; WARNING: the alarm cannot affect the service (independently from any protection).
Profile All Alarms. This profile enables the emission of all the alarms (included AIS and RDI). This profile uses the same severity of the Primary alarm profile, the only difference is that EW, LBER, AIS and RDI alarms are emitted. The rules used to define the alarm severity are the same of the Primary alarm profile. In case of alarms affecting a protection different severities are used for SA and NSA. The same severity is used both for SA and NSA in case of service independent alarms. The rules used to define the profile alarms severity described above, are not applied to the housekeeping alarms. In this case, in order to enhance the flexibility, a different severity is assigned to each alarm profile (WAR, MIN and MAJ).
N.B. N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 101 / 296
Fig. 44. Alarm Severities Profile In the screen of Fig. 44. on page 102 are available 2 buttons: N.B. Close: to close the screen. Clone: to create a new Alarm Sevetiry Profile. To create a clone refer to para. 22.3.1 on page 103. Only 2 new profiles can be created.
An Alarm Profile is the complete set of the equipment alarms with their severity in case of Service Affecting situation and No Service Affecting situation. Each alarm has its Service Affecting and No Service Affecting attribute, which can differ according to the Alarm Severity Profile. N.B. To some objects in the equipment (overhead alarm, input housekeeping alarm, tributaries etc.) can be assigned an Alarm Profile. To do this association: select the tab panel (Equipment, Line Interface, FSO etc.) in which is present the object to be associated to a specific Alarm Severity Profile; select the object; select the Configuration menu in the relevant Resource Detail Area; select in the Alarm Profile field the Alarm Profile to be associated.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 102 / 296
22.3.1 How to create a new Alarm Severity Profile

Select in the screen of Fig. 44. on page 102 the Alarm Profile to be cloned. Click the Clone pushbutton. The screen of Fig. 45. on page 103 appears. Digit the name to be assigned to the new Alarm Profile and click on Apply.
Fig. 45. Name of a cloned alarm profile Select again the Alarm Severity option from the Configuration menu. Select the just created Alarm Profile (Link 1 in the example of Fig. 46. on page 103).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 46. Clone of an Alarm Severity Profile
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 103 / 296
In this screen are available 4 buttons: Close: to close the screen without any change Rename: to change the name of the Alarm Severity Profile Modify: to modify the Alarm Severity Profile Delete: to delete the Alarm Severity Profile.
Click on the Modify button. To modify the severity of an alarm click on the Service Affecting field click on the suitable alarm and select a new severity (see Fig. 47. on page 104).
Fig. 47. Selection of a new severity in the Service Affecting field
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 104 / 296
To modify the severity of an alarm click on the No Service Affecting field click on the suitable alarm and select a new severity (see Fig. 48. on page 105).
Fig. 48. Selection of a new severity in the No Service Affecting field
To save the changes in the Alarm Severity Profile click on Apply. (By clicking on Cancel you quit the Alarm Severity Profile screen without any change) (see Fig. 48. on page 105).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 105 / 296
22.4 System Settings

This menu allows the system configuration, providing the setting of all the parameters for the NE setup. The main window provides 3 tabbedpanels, one for each type of function to be managed: NE configuration (V 1.0.0 and V 1.0.1) NE configuration (V 1.0.2) Link Identifier Overhead At the first configuration (i.e. with a flash card with an empty MIB) at the end of the configuration the Restart NE must be performed (refer to para. 28.2 on page 168). Should during this procedure to be selected a wrong type (i.e. PSU4860 instead of PSU24), to insert the correct type enter the System Settings menu NE configuration tab panel; select the correct type; click on Apply and then restart the EC by entering menu Supervision and by activating command Restart NE.
WARNING: WARNING:
22.4.1 NE Configuration (V 1.0.0 and V 1.0.1) The user can view and define the NE configuration by selecting the NE Parameters tabbed panel. The window displayed in Fig. 49. on page 106 will appear. The field Type contains all the allowed configurations supported for the NE (radio and FSO). The operator choice will be applied by selecting the related Apply button. The Structure area displays the market, capacity and modulation and, if needed, the ability to change it, according to NE market configured in the previous screen. The field Market contains two market types: ETSI or ANSI (refer to Tab. 1. and Tab. 2. ). The operator choice will be applied by clicking the related Apply button.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 49. System Settings: NE configuration (V 1.0.0 and V 1.0.1)
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 106 / 296
The information related to the modulation type is shown in the Modulation field. The possible values are 4QAM or 16QAM. The Capacity and the Modulation can be modified by selecting a different type according to Tab. 1. for the Radio application and Tab. 2. for the FSO application and then selecting the Apply button to send the new value. N.B. From 4QAM (PTMax) to 16QAM the Alarm incompatible PTx is light ON Tx Power value value is empty to set new PTx value (range) the Alarm incompatible PTx is light OFF
The Tributary Port Configuration area is in the lower part of the window. The Impedance field allows the operator to configure the impedance of the E1/DS1 tributary (unbalance 75 ohm or balance 120/100 ohm). The impedance value will be applied by clicking on the related Apply button. Tab. 1. Radio application: Market, capacity and modulation Market ETSI Capacity 2xE1 4xE1 8xE1 16xE1 1xE3 ANSI 4xDS1 8xDS1 16xDS1 1xDS3 Modulation 4QAM 4QAM / 16QAM 4QAM / 16QAM 4QAM / 16QAM 4QAM / 16QAM 4QAM 4QAM / 16QAM 4QAM / 16QAM 4QAM / 16QAM
Tab. 2. FSO application: Market, capacity and modulation Market ETSI Capacity 16xE1 1xE3 Modulation 4QAM 4QAM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 107 / 296
22.4.2 NE Configuration (V 1.0.2) The user can view and define the NE configuration by selecting the NE Parameters tabbed panel.
The window displayed in Fig. 49. on page 106 will appear. The field Type contains all the allowed configurations supported for the NE (radio and FSO). The operator choice will be applied by selecting the related Apply button. The Structure area displays the market, capacity and modulation and, if needed, the ability to change it, according to NE market configured in the previous screen. The field Market contains two market types: ETSI or ANSI (refer to Tab. 1. and Tab. 2. ). The operator choice will be applied by clicking the related Apply button.
Fig. 50. System Settings: NE configuration (V 1.0.2)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 108 / 296
The information related to the modulation type is shown in the Modulation field. The possible values are 4QAM or 16QAM. The operator choice will be applied by clicking the related Apply button.
N.B.
From 4QAM (PTMax) to 16QAM the Alarm incompatible PTx is light ON Tx Power value value is empty to set new PTx value (range) the Alarm incompatible PTx is light OFF
The Capacity can be modified by selecting a different type according to Tab. 1. for the Radio application and Tab. 2. for the FSO application and then selecting the Apply button to send the new value. N.B. After a change in the Type or Market or Capacity or Modulation field the explicit confirmation shown in Fig. 51. is requested.
Fig. 51. Confirmation message
N.B.
Only one change can be performed in this screen. When the user confirms the change in the Type or Market or Capacity or Modulation field all the other fields are disabled. To perform another change close the screen and enter again. After a change in the Type or Market or Capacity or Modulation field (for the Modulation only for the remote NE configuration) at the completion of the operation the CT forces the JUSM closing with the following warning message (see Fig. 52. ).
N.B.
Fig. 52. USM closing warning message

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 109 / 296
The Tributary Port Configuration area is in the lower part of the window. The Impedance field allows the operator to configure the impedance of the E1/DS1 tributary (unbalance 75 ohm or balance 120/100 ohm). The impedance value will be applied by clicking on the related Apply button. Tab. 3. Radio application: Market, capacity and modulation Market ETSI Capacity 2xE1 4xE1 8xE1 16xE1 1xE3 ANSI 4xDS1 8xDS1 16xDS1 1xDS3 Modulation 4QAM 4QAM / 16QAM 4QAM / 16QAM 4QAM / 16QAM 4QAM / 16QAM 4QAM 4QAM / 16QAM 4QAM / 16QAM 4QAM / 16QAM
Tab. 4. FSO application: Market, capacity and modulation Market ETSI Capacity 16xE1 1xE3 Modulation 4QAM 4QAM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 110 / 296
22.4.3 Link Indentifier The Link Identifier area, shown in Fig. 53. on page 111, displays the current values of parameters related to link management and, if necessary, modifies them. The operator choices will be sent to NE by clicking on the related Apply button. The parameters involved are: Mismatch detection: this field disables or enables the link identifier mismatch detection. Expected Value: this field is the link identifier value expected by the NE (allowed values: 1 to 16). Sent Value: this field is the link identifier value transmitted by the NE (allowed values: 1 to 16).
Fig. 53. System Settings: Link Identifier The operator choice will be applied by selecting the related Apply button.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 111 / 296
22.4.4 Overhead The Overhead tabbed panel identifies the parameters for the management of the phone number and auxiliary interface (Fig. 54. on page 112).
Fig. 54. Overhead Configuration The field Phone Number in the Order Wire Configuration area allows the operator to read and write the station number associated to the Engineering Order Wire to be used in the selective call. Possible values are: 1099. N.B. Number 00 is the value associated to the general call.
The parameter will be sent to NE by clicking on the related Apply button. The field Type in the Auxiliary Interface Configuration area allows the operator to change the interface of the auxiliary channels. The parameter will be sent to NE by clicking on the related Apply button. The field Alarm Profile allows to associate to the Overhead alarms a particular Alarm Profile: a default alarm profile or an Alarm Profile previously created by the Operator (refer to para. 22.3.1 on page 103). To associate a different Alarm Profile click on the selection button and make the selection among the available Alarm Profiles. N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
the default associated Alarm Profile is the Primary Alarm profile.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 112 / 296
22.5 Quick Configuration Procedure

This procedure allows a full system configuration through a guided process, based on a reduced set of screens. The related windows will be displayed by a Wizard Tool according to a specific order. To start this application, select the Quick Configuration option from the Configuration menu. The window in Fig. 55. on page 114 will appear. This window is the first step of the procedure. The procedure consists of different steps according to the configuration: 1+0 configuration: 6 steps for the simplified configuration 12 steps for the advanced configuration (the advanced configuration can be activated in step 5)
1+1 configuration: 7 steps for the simplified configuration 13 steps for the advanced configuration (the advanced configuration can activated in step 6)
Note on the use of the buttons available in the screens: Back: by clicking on this button the procedure goes back to the previous step Next: by clicking on this button the procedure goes on the next step Finish: this button is active only in the last step. By clicking on this button the operator confirms the configuration and the new parameters are sent to the equipment. Cancel: by clicking on this button the operator quits the procedure without any change in the configuration. Help: by clicking on this button the operator calls the helpon line.
In the following is explained step by step the most complete procedure for 1+1 configuration.
WARNING: WARNING:
At the first configuration (i.e. with a flash card with an empty MIB) at the end of the configuration the Restart NE must be performed (refer to para. 28.2 on page 160). Should during this procedure to be selected a wrong type (i.e. PSU4860 instead of PSU24), to insert the correct type enter the System Settings menu NE configuration tab panel; select the correct type; click on Apply and then restart the EC by entering menu Supervision and by activating command Restart NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 113 / 296
Step 1
Fig. 55. Quick Installation Procedure: NE Configuration (Step 1) The first step provides a screen to configure two NE parameters: Market (ETSI or ANSI); for FSO application the market is ETSI only; Type configuration. The possible selections for the Type field are: Radio application: 1+0 (PSU24 or PSU4860): 1+1 HST (PSU24 or PSU4860): 1+1 FD (PSU24 or PSU4860): 1+0 HST EXP (PSU24 or PSU4860): 1+0 FD EXP (PSU24 or PSU4860):
unprotected configuration Hot Standby protected configuration Frequency Diversity protected configuration Hot Standby extendable configuration Frequency Diversity extendable configuration
FSO application: 1+0 FSO (PSU24,PSU4860,PSUM4860H): unprotected configuration
The market choice implies a first selection of possible frame structure. The type definition implies the equipment configuration and other related functions: for example, the protection schemes supported. N.B. for V 1.0.2 only: For the Remote NE in this step the Type and the Market cannot be modified. To modify them the System Settings menu must be used (refer to para. 22.4.2 on page 108).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To go to step 2 click on button Next.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 114 / 296
Step 2 The screen shown in Fig. 56. on page 115 provides the fields to set the Structure of the Frame configuration (Capacity and Modulation). The capacity implies the choice of modulation; for example, if the tributary structure is 2E1 (for ETSI market) only 4QAM modulation scheme is supported. N.B. The association between Capacity and Modulation is shown in Tab. 1. and Tab. 2. on page 107.
Moreover, if the tributary selected is E1 the Impedance also must be selected in the Tributary Port Configuration (unbalance 75 ohm or balance 120 ohm).
Fig. 56. Quick Installation Procedure: Frame Configuration (Step 2)
In the screen displayed in Fig. 56. on page 115 (and in the following Steps), the Back button is enabled also. It allows the operator to turn back and change the parameters configured in the previous screen. N.B. in FSO application the applicable capacity is 16E1 or E3 only and modulation is 4 QAM only. For the Remote NE in this step the Capacity and the Modulation cannot be modified. To modify them the System Settings menu must be used (refer to para. 22.4.2 on page 108).
N.B. for V 1.0.2 only:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To go to the next step click on button Next. To go back to the previous step click on button Back.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 115 / 296
Step 3 Step 3 allows the operator to choose, for each tributary configured, the signal mode or disable it (Fig. 57. on page 116).
Fig. 57. Quick Installation Procedure: Tributaries Configuration (Step 3) By clicking on the one facility button (All Framed, All Unframed and All Disabled), the operator can configure all the tributaries with the same values; otherwise he can apply all configuration for each tributary by selecting the related value from the relevant scroll list. N.B. This procedure can be used also after the first configuration to perform multiple changes in the configuration both in the local and in the remote NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 116 / 296
Step 4 Step 4 allows the operator to choose the restoration criteria (revertive or not revertive for the 3 possible protections available in the 1+1 configuration (Fig. 58. on page 117): Radio protection (Rx EPS) Mux protection (Tx EPS) HST Tx protection (RF Hot Standby)
Fig. 58. Quick Installation Procedure: Tributaries Configuration (Step 4)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 117 / 296
Step 5 Step 5 allows the operator to define the basic paramters for each configured channel. The related screen is shown in the Fig. 59. on page 118:
Fig. 59. Quick Configuration Procedure: Channels Configuration (Step 5) In the Channel Configuration area the ATPC can be Enabled or Disabled. If enabled, the other ATPC parameters (min. value, max. value and Rx threshold) must be configured in RTPC & ATPC menu in the Radio domain (refer to para. 25.4 on page 146). If ATPC is disabled in the RTPC area the power (costantly transmitted) can be selected by writing the suitable value in the Tx power field. In the Frequency Value area the Tx operating frequency must be written in the Tx Freq field. N.B. for V 1.0.2 only: The Tx Frequency value can be changed only on the Local NE (To change the Tx frequency for the Remote NE use the Radio menu refer to para. 25.3 on page 145).
The Rx Frequency is automatically changed according to the frequency shifter available with the ODU. All the values must be selected according to the relevant allowed ranges (shown between brackets). N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In case of 1+1HST the choices will be applied to both channels. In case of 1+1FD, the same screen will be reproposed for channel 0 with the same choices applied for channel 1, with the possibility to change the frequency, but without any possibility to change ATPC/RTPC selection.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 118 / 296
Step 6 Step 6 performs the network configuration (Fig. 60. on page 119). This window allows to enter to IP address associated to the F interface of the NE. N.B. for V 1.0.2 only: The IP Address can be changed only on the Local NE (To change the IP Address for the Remote NE use the menu Configuration Network Configuration Local Configuration refer to para. 22.2.1 on page 91).
Fig. 60. Quick Configuration Procedure: Local IP Address (Step 6) For an advanced network configuration the operator must select the Advanced Configuration flag. If the flag has been selected, the screens in the next steps allow the operator to perform a complete configuration of all the Network parameters. To go to the next step click on button Next. To go back to the previous step click on button Back.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 119 / 296
Step 7 Step 7 allows to configure one or more OSPF Areas (3 areas max.) (Fig. 61. on page 120).
Fig. 61. Quich Installation Procedure: OSPF Area Configuration (Step 7) To create a new area write a number in the Area Id field, in the IP address field write the address and in the Range Mask field enter the range associated to the OSPF area and click on Add button. If the OSPF area must be a stub area, make the selection in the Stub Area check box. In the upper part of the screen the new OSPF area will appear. To remove or change an OSPF Area Configuration select the Area in the upper part and click on Remove or Change button. To go to the next step click on button Next. To go back to the previous step click on button Back.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 120 / 296
Step 8 The following windows for Network Configuration allow the complete IP configuration.
Step 8 configures one or more Static Routers (Fig. 62. on page 121).
Fig. 62. Quick Installation Procedure: IP Static Router Configuration (Step 8) The following fields and data are present: [1] [2] [3] [4] Host Address: Network Address: Gateway Address: PPP: allows to define the IP address necessary to reach a specific Host. it is in alternative to the Host Address; allows to define the IP Mask to reach a network. allows to define the address of the next hop gateway. it allows to use the point to point interfaces (the 3 NMS channels) available with the NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 121 / 296
Step 9 Step 9 allows the configuration of the NMSRF channel (Fig. 63. on page 122):
Fig. 63. Quick Configuration Procedure: NMSRF Interface Configuration (Step 9)
The NMSRF interface is a communication interface based on the use of an inframe RF proprietary 64 kbit/s channel. Through the NMSRF interface the NE can exchange management messages with a remote OS (or Craft Terminal) station. The NMSRF channel can be Enabled or Disabled by selection in the NMS RF field. If enabled, in the Remote Address field will appear the IP address of the remote connected NE. In the Routing IP Protocol field enter the used IP protocol and in case of OSPF protocol select also the associated OSPF area. To go to the next step click on button Next. To go back to the previous step click on button Back.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 122 / 296
Step 10 Step 10 allows the configuration of the NMSV11 interface (Fig. 64. on page 123):
Fig. 64. Quick Configuration Procedure: NMSV11 Interface Configuration (Step 10) Through the NMSV11 interface the NE can exchange management messages with an OS (or Craft Terminal) in the same station. The NMSV11 channel can be Enabled or Disabled by selection in the NMS V11 field. If enabled, in the Remote Address field will appear the IP address of the remote connected NE. In the Routing IP Protocol field enter the used IP protocl and in case of OSPF protocol select also the associated OSPF area. In the PPP_MODE field the following selections can be made: DTE mode: to interface an SDH service channel, where DCE mode is not available because of the common synchronisation of the SDH network. Codirectional mode: to allow the routing of the LUX40 NMS, avoiding the needed V11/Eth adapter or to link adjacent AWY.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 123 / 296
Step 11 Step 11 allows the configuration of the NMSG703 interface (Fig. 65. on page 124):
Fig. 65. Quick Configuration Procedure: NMSG703 Interface Configuration (Step 11) Through the NMSG703 interface the NE can exchange management messages with an OS (or Craft Terminal) in the same station. The NMSG703 channel can be Enabled or Disabled by selection in the NMS G703 field. If enabled, in the Remote Address field will appear the IP address of the remote connected NE. In the Routing IP Protocol field enter the used IP protocl and in case of OSPF protocol select also the associated OSPF area. In the PPP_MODE field the following selections can be made: DTE mode: to interface an SDH service channel, where DCE mode is not available because of the common synchronisation of the SDH network. Codirectional mode: to link adjacent AWY or to interface MUX based on 64 kbit/s, avoiding any V.11/G.703 adapter. In frame E1DS1 mode: as alternative mode is possible to drop in the G703 64 kbit/s in Tributary 1, Time Slot 1 allowing the transport of supervision messages along the traffic path.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 124 / 296
Step 12 Step 12 (Fig. 66. on page 125) allows to configure the Ethernet Interface.
Fig. 66. Quick Installation Procedure: Ethernet Configuration (Step 12)
The Ethernet interface can be Enabled or Disabled by selection in the Ethernet configuration field. If enabled, in the relevant fields below enter the IP address, the IP mask and select the Routing IP protocol. If the selected routing protocol has been OSPF, select also the area number in the Associated OSPF Area field. To go to the next step click on button Next. To go back to the previous step click on button Back.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 125 / 296
Step 13 Step 13 is the last step. The screen shown summarizes all the parameters configured during this procedure and some relevant parameters with default values (Fig. 67. on page 126).
Fig. 67. Quick Configuration Procedure: Summary (Step 13)
All the parameters can still be changed by clicking on the Back button. The operator can navigate back to the desired screen and set the new values. At the end the operator can confirm the selections by pressing the Finish button. All the parameters will be stored and sent to the NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 126 / 296
23 EQUIPMENT
This chapter describes the types of functions offered to the user for Equipment Management.
N.B.
Please refer to Appendix A on page 243 for the detailed description of equipment functions and components.
The equipment domain deals with the management of the NE as a whole and its physical components (subrack, boards,..) The main screen of the Equipment tab panel is shown in Fig. 68. on page 127 for 1+0 FSO configuration. The main screen of the Equipment tab panel is shown in Fig. 69. on page 128 for 1+0 Radio configuration. The main screen of the Equipment tab panel is shown in Fig. 70. on page 128 for 1+1 Radio configuration. In the Resource List Area is shown a graphical representation of the Equipment, which consists of an IDU and an ODU. A coloured ball gives information on the status of the associated object. The colour differs according to the severity of the alarms: Green: no alarm White: indetermination alarm active (not operative) Cyanic: warning alarm active Yellow: minor alarm active Brown: major alarm active Red: critical alarm active
Equipment Status
FSO ODU
ODU Status
IDU IDU Status
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 68. 1+0 FSO Equipment view
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 127 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ODU IDU ODU Fig. 69. 1+0 Radio Equipment view IDU Status Equipment Status Equipment Status ODU Status
03
IDU
Fig. 70. 1+1 Radio Equipment view
IDU Status
3DB 05653 CA AA ODU Status
296
128 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Fig. 71. 1+0 EXP Radio Equipment view
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
129 / 296
23.1 IDU level

To enter the IDU level click on the IDU object in the Resource Tree Area or double click on the IDU image in the Resource Detail Area. 23.1.1 1+0 configuration Configuration available both with 9400AWY and 9400FSO. The screen in Fig. 72. on page 130 will appear.
IDU Status
ACCESS BOARD Status ACCESS BOARD MAIN BOARD
IDU MAIN BOARD Status
Fig. 72. 1+0 IDU view The IDU consists of 2 boards: Access board Main board
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 130 / 296
23.1.2 1+0 extendable and 1+1 configuration Configurations available with 9400AWY only.
The screen in Fig. 73. on page 131 will appear.
IDU ACCESS BOARD MAIN BOARD EXTENSION BOARD
IDU Status
ACCESS BOARD Status FANS BOARD
EXTENSION BOARD Status
MAIN BOARD Status
FANS BOARD Status
Fig. 73. 1+1 IDU view The IDU consists of 4 boards: Access board Main board Extension board (not present in 1+0 extendable configuration) Fans board 23.1.3 Procedure for configuration change from 1+0 extendable to 1+1 There are many ways to proceed for this configuration change, but some of them give no good results. Thus, follow this procedure to obtain a correct result, without traffic impacts: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Install the second ODU unit and the relevant IDUODU cable (refer to 9400AWY Installation Handbook) On IDU, extract the dummy plate closing the Extension board slot Get the Extension board, switch off it, insert it in the shelf and connect the IDUODU cable Set, by Local ECT, 1+1 configuration using System Setting function Restart the NE Switch on the Extension board Proceed as specified in the 9400AWY Installation Handbook and LineUp Guide for the operations regarding the second ODU installed. In particular, set, by Local CT, Tx Power and Tx Frequency values related to second ODU.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 131 / 296
23.1.4 Board level To enter a board click on the object in the Resource Tree Area or double click on the board image in the Resource Detail Area. As example in Fig. 74. on page 132 is shown the screen of the MAIN IDU board.
BOARD Status
Fig. 74. Main board view
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 132 / 296
23.2 ODU level

To enter the ODU level click on the ODU object in the Resource Tree Area or double click on the ODU image in the Resource Detail Area. The screen in Fig. 75. on page 133 will appear in case of FSO configuration. The screen in Fig. 76. on page 133 will appear in case of Radio configuration.
Fig. 75. FSO ODU view
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 76. Radio ODU view
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 133 / 296
23.3 Tab panels in the Resource Detail Aarea

23.3.1 Alarms The Alarms tab panel provides the fault mangement, which checks the current state of alarms related to the selected object (Fig. 77. on page 134).
Fig. 77. Alarm tab panel for a selected object The alarm tab panel has one row for each possible alarm, but only rows related to the active alarms are highlighted. When the alarm disappears it is automatically cleared in the screen. By putting a tick in the Include alarms from subnodes box the alarms currently active in the subnodes of the object will also appear. For every alarm the following information is given: Severity: the severity associated to the alarm and assigned in the Alarm Profile Event Time: the time of the generation of the alarm Entity: the entity involved in the alarm Probable Cause: the probable cause of the alarm Managed Object Class: the class of the alarm.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 134 / 296
23.3.2 Configuration The User Label field (Fig. 78. ) only display the label associated to the selected node in the tree.
The field Alarm Profile allows to associate to the object alarms a particular Alarm Profile: a default alarm profile or an Alarm Profile previously created by the Operator (refer to para. 22.3.1 on page 103). To associate a different Alarm Profile click on the selection button and make the selection among the available Alarm Profile. N.B. the default associated Alarm Profile is the Primary Alarm profile.
Fig. 78. Configuration tab panel for a selected object
23.3.3 Remote Inventory The information about the unit can be read in the Remote Inventory panel in the Resource Detail Area as following window shows (Fig. 79. on page 135):
Fig. 79. Remote Inventory tab panel for a selected object

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 135 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
136 / 296
24 LINE INTERFACE
This chapter describes the type of functions available for Line Interface Management. The Line Interface domain deals with the management of the aggregate frame and tributary ports (line side). The Line Interface view allows the user to manage the resources of a PDH signal, i.e. frames, tributary ports (line), etc. This domain view consists of the following areas (Fig. 80. on page 137): Resource Tree Area: displays the frames and tributary ports sorted by the channel number. Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the selected resource in the tree area. Resource Detail Area: displays, through tabbed windows, the selected object s properties in list area. This area performs the available functions for involved resource.
Fig. 80. Line Interface View In the Resource List Area is given the information related to the tributaries:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Type Interface (E1/E3, DS1/DS3) Port Number: the port for a given channel and type of port Channel Number: the number of a channel Rate/Modulation: the bit rate of the tributary Signal Mode: the type of frame (Unframed/Framed/Disabled)
To change the Signal Mode select the tributary and change the Signal Mode field in the Resource Detail Area.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 137 / 296
24.1 Tab panels in the Resource Detail Area

24.1.1 Alarm The fault mangement checks the current state of alarms related to the selected tributary. It is provided by the alarm panel like the one explained in para. 23.3.1 on page 134.
24.1.2 Configuration 24.1.2.1 E1/E3 tributaries The window, shown in Fig. 81. on page 138 and Fig. 82. on page 138, performs all available functions for a tributary port. The managed tributary types are: E1, E3. To define the involved ports, the channel selection in the tree view is first required; therefore the selection of the desired tributary port in the tabular view enables the Resource Detail list to show the available functions for the single one resource.
Fig. 81. Line Interface View: E1 Tributary Port
Fig. 82. Line Interface View: E3 Tributary Port

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 138 / 296
In Fig. 81. on page 138 and Fig. 82. on page 138 the following fields are read only fields:
Interface Type (E1, E3) Port Number: identifies the ports for a given channel and type of port Channel Number
The fields, which can be changed, are: Signal Mode Tx RAI Insertion Rx RAI Insertion Alarm Profile
Signal Mode (for E1 tributary) The possible values are: Framed for the framed received signal Unframed for the unframed received signal Disabled
The current state can be modified selecting a different signal mode value and then click on the Apply button to send the new value to NE.
Signal Mode (for E3 tributary) The possible values are: Framed G.751 for the framed received signal Framed G.753 for the framed received signal (not applicable) Unframed for the unframed received signal Disabled
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 139 / 296
Tx RAI Insertion (for E1 tributary only) This feature is available for framed signals only.
This field refers to the insertion of the RAI signal in Tx side. The possible values are: Inibited: it is not possible to force the RAI insertion Forced: the RAI insertion is performed Enabled: the RAI insertion is possible.
Rx RAI Insertion (for E1 tributary only) This feature is available for framed signals only. This field refers to the insertion of the RAI signal in Rx side. The possible values are: Inibited: it is not possible to force the RAI insertion Forced: the RAI insertion is performed Enabled: the RAI insertion is possible.
The current state can be modified selecting a different signal mode value and then click on the Apply button to send the new value to NE. Alarm Profile The field Alarm Profile allows to associate to the tributary alarms a particular Alarm Profile: a default alarm profile or an Alarm Profile previously created by the Operator (refer to para. 22.3.1 on page 103). To associate a different Alarm Profile click on the selection button and make the selection among the available Alarm Profile. N.B. the default associated Alarm Profile is the No Alarm profile.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 140 / 296
24.1.2.2 DS1/DS3 tributaries The window, shown in Fig. 83. on page 141 and Fig. 84. on page 141, performs all available functions for a tributary port. The managed tributary types are: DS1, DS3. To define the involved ports, the channel selection in the tree view is first required; therefore the selection of the desired tributary port in the tabular view enables the Resource Detail list to show the available functions for the single one resource.
Fig. 83. Line Interface View: DS1 Tributary Port
Fig. 84. Line Interface View: DS3 Tributary Port In Fig. 83. on page 141 and Fig. 84. on page 141 the following fields are read only fields: Interface Type (DS1/DS3) Port Number: identifies the ports for a given channel and type of port Channel Number
The fields, which can be changed, are:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Signal Mode Line Coding (AMI/B8ZS: for DS1 tributary only) Line length (0133,133266, 266399, 399533, 533655: for DS1 tributary only) Alarm Profile
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 141 / 296
Signal Mode (for DS1 tributary) The possible values are:

Framed SF for the Super Framed received signal Framed ESF for the Extended Super Framed received signal Unframed for the unframed received signal Disabled
The current state can be modified selecting a different signal mode value and then click on the Apply button to send the new value to NE. Signal Mode (for DS3 tributary) The possible values are: Framed for the framed received signal Unframed for the unframed received signal Disabled
The current state can be modified selecting a different signal mode value and then click on the Apply button to send the new value to NE. Line Coding (for DS1 tributary only) This field refers to the coding relevant to the tributary signal. The possible values are: B8ZS AMI
The current state can be modified selecting a different signal mode value and then click on the Apply button to send the new value to NE. Line Length (for DS1 tributary only) This field refers to the length of the connected line. The possible values are: 0133 133266 266399 399533 533655
The current state can be modified selecting a different signal mode value and then click on the Apply button to send the new value to NE. Alarm Profile The field Alarm Profile allows to associate to the tributary alarms a particular Alarm Profile: a default alarm profile or an Alarm Profile previously created by the Operator (refer to para. 22.3.1 on page 103). To associate a different Alarm Profile click on the selection button and make the selection among the available Alarm Profile. N.B. the default associated Alarm Profile is the No Alarm profile. 03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 142 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
25 RADIO
The Radio domain view allows the user to manage the resources of the radio transmission channel.
A Radio NE consists of one or two radio channels with a set of functional blocks (tributary ports, radio ports etc). This domain view consists of the following areas (Fig. 85. on page 143): Resource Tree Area: displays the radio ports sorted by channel number. Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the selected resource in tree area. Resource Detail Area: displays, through tabbed windows, the object s properties selected in the list area. This area enables to execute the available functions for involved resource.
Fig. 85. Radio Domain View Five tab panels are present in the Resourse Detail Area:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Alarms: shows the active alarms (refer to para. 25.1 on page 144) Configuration: configures some radio parameters (refer to para. 25.2 on page 144) Frequency: sets the Tx RF frequency (refer to para. 25.3 on page 145) RTPC & ATPC: sets the manual operation parameters or the automatic operation parameters (refer to para. 25.4 on page 146) Power Meas: performs the Tx and Rx power measurements (refer to para. 25.5 on page 147).
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 143 / 296
25.1 Alarm
The fault mangement allows to check the current state of alarms related to the selected object. It is provided by the alarm panel like that shown in para. 23.3.1 on page 134.
25.2 Configuration
The window shown in Fig. 94. on page 154 performs all the available functions for a Radio PDH port. To define the involved port, first select the port/channel in the tabular view: this selection enables the Resource Detail list to show the available functions for the single resource. 25.2.1 Local or Remote Transmitter Mute The information related to the transmitter status is shown in the Tx Mute field. To change the transmitter status choose the desired value (ON for Tx Squelched and OFF for Tx not Squelched) and press the related Apply button. 25.2.2 ODU service kit This field is a readonly field, which displays the state of the Portable Service Kit (connected or not to the ODU). 25.2.3 Alarm Profile The field Alarm Profile allows to associate a particular Alarm Profile to the object alarms: a default alarm profile or an Alarm Profile previously created by the Operator (refer to para. 22.3.1 on page 103). To associate a different Alarm Profile click on the selection button and select among the available Alarm Profile. N.B. the default associated Alarm Profile is the Primary Alarm profile.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 144 / 296
25.3 Frequency
This menu (Fig. 86. on page 145) allows to read and, if necessary, to set the frequency parameters.
The information shown concerns the port/channel selected in the Resource Tabular View.
Fig. 86. Radio Frequency menu
25.3.1 Tx Radio Frequency The Tx Freq field in the Frequency Value area of tabbed window (Fig. 86. on page 145) shows the current value of the transmission radio frequency (expressed in kHz). To change this parameter write the new value in the field and press the Apply button. The new value must be within the allowed radio frequency range. The allowed range is shown in Min/Max Value fields. N.B. During the command setting the CT is frozen. Waiting time: max. 30.
25.3.2 Rx Radio Frequency The Rx Freq field in the Frequency Value area of the tabbed window (Fig. 86. on page 145) shows the current value of the receive radio frequency (expressed in kHz).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
It is automatically changed as a consequence of the definition of the Tx frequency according to the Frequency Shifter.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 145 / 296
25.4 RTPC & ATPC

This menu (Fig. 87. on page 146) allows to read and, if necessary, to set the Tx power parameters. The shown information is related to the channel selected in the Resource Tabular View.
Fig. 87. Rtpc & Atpc
25.4.1 ATPC The ATPC can be Enabled or Disabled. The new value will be applied when the Apply button is pressed. If the ATPC has been enabled, the ATPC Range and ATPC Rx Threshold fields must be filled. 25.4.2 Tx Nominal Power The Nominal Value field in the RTPC area (Fig. 87. on page 146) is a readonly field and shows the nominal value of the transmitted power (expressed in dBm). 25.4.3 Tx Current Power The Tx Power field in the RTPC area (Fig. 87. on page 146) shows the current value of Tx power (expressed in dBm), when the ATPC is disabled . In this case, it is possible to modify this value ERROR FREE in ATPC Range (Pnom 20 db) with 2 dB max step allowed, by writing the new value and by pressing the related Apply button.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B. During the command setting the CT is frozen. Waiting time: < 15. The new value must be within the allowed transmitted power range. This range is shown in the Power Value label of RTPC area. If the Atpc is enabled, the Tx power value cannot be modified.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 146 / 296
25.4.4 ATPC Range

The Min Value and Max Value, for Tx Range in the Atpc management, are shown in the Atpc Range area. The min and max level can be changed by writing the new value in the field. When the Apply button is pressed the new values will be applied.
25.4.5 ATPC Rx Threshold The value of the power low threshold can be changed by writing the new value in the field. When the Apply button is pressed the new values will be applied.
25.5 Power Measurement

The Power Measurements capability is performed through the Power Meas tabbed panel in the resource detail view (Fig. 88. on page 147).
Fig. 88. Power Measurements

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Measurement screen allows the operator to set initial parameters for the required measurement.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 147 / 296
Measurement interval fields allow the operator to set the timeduration of the measurement. The default is Days: 7, Hours: 0, Minutes: 0. A 7day measurement interval is also the maximum allowed interval. Sample time field is the period between two consecutive measurement samples. The choice is among 2, 6, 30, 60 sec. The last section of the dialog is referred to an optional Log file. By selecting Create File the log file is created and a default path and name for this file is displayed to the operator. The file is stored in the ALCATEL/CTKv3.0.1 directory. N.B. The file name must not include the following characters: \ ? : * < > |.
The log file contains the sample value and records the measurement up to a maximum dimension ( 7 days for a 2 s sample time). By clicking on the Start button the screen Power Measurement Graphic appears (see Fig. 97. on page 157). The Power Measurement Graphic is available only if the CT is connected to the NE. The screen in Fig. 89. shows the Tx and Rx measurements related to the local NE. Through this screen the operator can see, in real time, the power transmitted by the local and remote transmitter (Tx) and the power received by the local and remote receiver (Rx). The top graphic screen area shows the TX curves (local and remote), while the bottom area shows the Rx curves (local and remote). Note that the colors represent the linked endpoint of the two NE; for example, if the local TX is blue, the remote receiver will also have the same color. The top of the screen offers all the characteristics present in the current measurement: Radio port: gives the symbolic name associated to the radio channel being analized; Sample time: indicates the frequency used to send the measurement requests to NE; Start time: is the first request time; Stop time: is the interval time selected in the previous parameters window, added to the start time; Time: is the current response time; Log File: is the complete pathname of the file where the received values are stored.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 148 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Fig. 89. Power Measurement Graphic
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
149 / 296
By clicking on Show details box, on the left side of the Power Measurement Graphic (see Fig. 89. on page 149), a new table appears (Fig. 90. on page 150); this table shows the following relevant values of the received and transmitted power:
Tx Local End
max TX local value and date when this value was received for the first time. min. TX local value and its current date when this value was received for the first time. current TX local value and its current date.
Tx Far End
max TX remote value and date when this value was received for the first time. min. TX remote value and its current date when this value was received for the first time. current TX remote value and its current date.
Rx Local End
max Rx local value and date when this value was received for the first time. min. Rx local value and its current date when this value was received for the first time. current Rx local value and its current date.
Rx Far End
max Rx remote value and date when this value was received for the first time. min. Rx remote value and its current date when this value was received for the first time. current Rx remote value and its current date. PTx and PRx levels software readings tolerance is: PTx = Real Value 3dB PRx = Real Value 5dB
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 90. Power Meas Details
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 150 / 296
25.5.1 How to read a Power Measurement file Click on Read File field and press on the Select File button. The directory of the CT automatically opens to navigate and get the power measurement file. N.B. as default, the measurement files are stored in the ALCATEL/CTKv3.0.1 directory and have extension .txt.
Fig. 91. Name of File ( Log File ) selected screen Select the desired file and click the Start button in Fig. 88. on page 147 to open the file.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 92. Example of Power Measurement File Reading The button in the lower part of the window allow to flow the graph within the measurement interval.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 151 / 296
Select the .txt file and click with the mouse right pushbutton to open .txt file with a text editor (e.g. WordPad) and to see the power information in tabular mode (see Fig. 93. on page 152).
Fig. 93. Example of Power Measurement File Reading (with WordPad)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 152 / 296
26 FSO
N.B.
This menu is available in V.1.0.1 and V.1.0.2 only.
The FSO domain view allows the user to manage the resources of the FSO transmission channel. This domain view consists of the following areas: Resource Tree Area: displays the FSO port. Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the selected resource in tree area. Resource Detail Area: dislpays, through tabbed windows, the object s properties selected in the list area. This area enables to execute the available functions for involved resource.
In the Resource Tree Area the following objects can be selected: Channel#1 FSO Port#1 Ch#1 Laser#1 or Laser#2 refer to para. 26.1 on page 154 refer to para. 26.2 on page 155 refer to para. 26.3 on page 161
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 153 / 296
26.1 Channel#1
By selecting the Channel 1 object in the Resource Tree Area the screen in Fig. 94. on page 154 appears:
Fig. 94. FSO Domain View In the Resource List Area is shown the following information: Type Interface: the type of the interface (FSO Port only) Port number: the number of the port (port 1 only) Channel number: the number of the channel (channel 1 only) Heater status: the status of the heater installed inside the FSO ODU (Off/On). To activate the Heater select FSO Port#1 Ch#1 in the Resource Tree Area and select Configuration in the Resource Detail Area. Rx Power: the power of the received signal in dBm Temperature: the internal temperature inside the FSO ODU measured by an internal temperature sensor.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 154 / 296
26.2 FSO Port#1 Ch#1

By selecting the FSO Port#1 Ch#1 object in the Resource Tree Area the screen in Fig. 95. on page 155 appears.
Fig. 95. FSO port configuration In the Resource List Area is shown the following information: Type Interface: the type of the interface (FSO Port only) Port number: the number of the port (port 1 only) Channel number: the number of the channel (channel 1 only) Laser Index: the identification number of the 2 Lasers installed in the FSO ODU. Laser Status: the status of the Laser (On/Off). To switch on or off a Laser select the Laser object in the Resource Tree Area and select Configuration in the relevant Resource Detail Area.
Three tab panels are present in the Resourse Detail Area:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Alarms: shows the active alarms (refer to para. 26.2.1 on page 156) Configuration: configures some FSO parameters (refer to para. 26.2.2 on page 156) Power Meas: performs the Tx and Rx power measurements (refer to para. 26.2.3 on page 156).
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 155 / 296
26.2.1 Alarm The fault mangement allows to check the current state of alarms related to the selected object.
It is provided by the alarm panel like that shown in para. 23.3.1 on page 134. 26.2.2 Configuration The window shown in Fig. 95. on page 155 performs all the available functions for the FSO port. To define the involved port, first select the port/channel in the tabular view: this selection enables the Resource Detail list to show the available functions for the resource. 26.2.3 Measurements The Measurement screen (see Fig. 96. on page 156) allows the operator to set initial parameters for the required measurement. Measurement interval fields allow the operator to set the time duration of the measurement. The default is Days:7, Hours: 0, Minutes: 0. A 7day measurement interval is also the maximum allowed interval. Sample time field is the period between two consecutive measurement samples. The choice is among 2, 6, 30, 60 sec. The last section of the dialog is referred to an optional Log file. By selecting Create File the log file is created and a default path and name for this file is displayed to the operator. The file is stored in the ALCATEL/CTKv3.0.1 directory. N.B. The file name must not include the following characters: \ ? : * < > |.
The log file contains the sample value and records the measurement up to a maximum dimension ( 7 days for a 2 s sample time).
Fig. 96. Measurements screen

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
By clicking on the Start button the screen Power Measurement Graphic appears (see Fig. 97. on page 157).
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 156 / 296
Fig. 97. Power Measurement Graphic Screen The Power Measurement Graphic is available only if the CT is connected to NE. The screen in Fig. 97. on page 157 shows the current Rx measurement and the ODU alarms related to the local NE. The top graphic screen area shows the Rx curve, while the bottom area shows the alarms active in the ODU. The alarms have different colors according to their severity. The top of the screen offers all the characteristics present in the current measurement: FSO port: gives the symbolic name associated to the channel that you are analyzing Sample time: indicates the frequency used to send the measurement requests to NE; Start time: is the first request time; Stop time: is the interval time selected in the previous parameters window, added to the start time; Time: is the current response time; Log File: is the complete pathname of the file where the received values are stored.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 157 / 296
By clicking on Show details box, on the left side of the Power Measurement Graphic (see Fig. 97. on page 157), a new table appears (Fig. 98. on page 158); this table shows the following relevant values of the received and transmitted power:
Rx Local End
max Rx local value and date when this value was received for the first time. min. Rx local value and its current date when this value was received for the first time. current Rx local value and its current date.
Fig. 98. Details Dialog screen
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 158 / 296
26.2.3.1 How to read a Power Measurement file Click on Read File field and press on the Select File button. The directory of the CT automatically opens to navigate and get the power measurement file. N.B. as default the measurement files are stored in the ALCATEL/CTKv3.0.1 directory and have extension .txt.
Fig. 99. Name of File ( Log File ) selected screen Select the desired file and click the Start button in Fig. 96. on page 156 to open the file.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 100. Example of Power Measurement File Reading The button in the lower part of the window allow to flow the graph within the measurement interval.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 159 / 296
Select the .txt file and click with the mouse right pushbutton to open .txt file with a text editor (e.g. WordPad) and to see the power information in tabular mode (see Fig. 101. on page 160).
Fig. 101. Example of Power Measurement File Reading (with WordPad)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 160 / 296
26.3 Laser#1 or Laser#2

By selecting the Laser object in the Resource Tree Area the screen in Fig. 102. on page 161 appears.
Fig. 102. FSO laser configuration In the Resource List Area is shown the following information: Type Interface: the type of the interface (FSO Port only) Port number: the number of the port (port 1 only) Channel number: the number of the channel (channel 1 only) Laser Index: the identification number of the 2 Lasers installed in the FSO ODU. Laser Status: the status of the Laser (On/Off). To switch on or off a Laser select Configuration in the relevant Resource Detail Area. In the Laser status field 4 options are available: On: the selected Laser is switched ON Off: the selected Laser is switched OFF On All: both Lasers (1 and 2) are switched ON Off All: both Lasers (1 and 2) are switched OFF
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 161 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
162 / 296
27 EXTERNAL POINTS
This chapter describes the types of functions offered to the user for External Points Management. There are two types of external points: input and output external points. By clicking on the tree root, displayed in Fig. 103. on page 163, the tree will be expanded according to the equipment configuration. A single left click selection of a tree element causes the activation of the corresponding Tabular representation displayed in the Resource list area. A click on a row in the Resourse list area opens the Configuration menu in the Resourse Detail Area. An example of this mechanism is diplayed in the Fig. 103. on page 163.
27.1 Input External Points

An input external point is described by the following parameters (Fig. 103. on page 163): Id: identification number UserLabel: associates a userfriendly name to an external point Polarity: describes the polarity (Active Closed/ Active Opened) External State: describes the state (on /off) Alarm Profile: describes the associated Alarm Profile
The lower part provides the possible parameters, which can be modified; after a row selection, the user can modify the User Label, the Polarity and can associate a different Alarm Profile by clicking on the Selection button. The operator choices will be sent to NE after selecting the Apply button.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 103. Input External Point View
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 163 / 296
27.2 Output External Points (in V.1.0.0)

An output external point is described by the following parameters (Fig. 104. on page 164): Id: identification number UserLabel: associate a userfriendly name to an external point Polarity: describes the polarity (Active Closed/ Active Opened) External State: describes the state (on /off)
The lower part provides the possible parameters which can be modified; after a row selection, the user can modify the User Label, Polarity and External State of the external point selected (On=active; Off=not active). The operator choices will be sent to NE by clicking on the Apply button.
Fig. 104. Output External Points View
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 164 / 296
27.3 Output External Points (in V.1.0.1 and V.1.0.2)

Seven output external points are available (Fig. 105. on page 165):
The first four external points (CPO#1, 2, 3, 4) are described by the following parameters: Id: identification number UserLabel: a userfriendly name can be associated to an external point Polarity: describes the polarity (Active Closed/ Active Opened). In this field the polarity of the external point can be changed. External State: describes the state (on /off). In this field the external point can be activated (on) or deactivated (off).
The operator choices will be sent to NE by clicking on the Apply button. The last three external points (FAIL IDU, FAIL ODU Ch.#1, FAIL ODU Ch.#0) are described by the following parameters: N.B. Id: identification number UserLabel: a userfriendly name can be associated to an external point Polarity: describes the polarity (Active Closed/ Active Opened). In this field the polarity of the external point can be changed. These three output external points are automatically activated when the relevant equipment summarizing alarm is active.
The operator choices will be sent to NE by clicking on the Apply button.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 105. Output External Points View
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 165 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
N.B.
03
Its not possible to associate an output with an internal alarm, while is possibile to associate a Profile alarm on each input.
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
166 / 296
28 SUPERVISION 28.1 Access state (allow or inhibit NE Craft access)

The NE can be managed by the OS or by the Craft Terminal. To control the competition of the OS and the CT, a Local Access Control (LAC) is available. If the LAC is access denied, it means that the OS manages the NE and the CT is not allowed to modify the NE configuration (it can only read). In the view, the icon with a key symbol has a circular shape. If the LAC is granted, it means that the CT is allowed to manage the NE. In the view, the icon with a key symbol has a rectangular shape. If the LAC is requested, it means that the CT has requested a permission from the OS and is waiting for a replay. However, the OS does continue to provide a certain number of services. These services include: Alarm reception and processing, Performance processing, Switching back to the OS access state.
The access state of an NE can be modified from two types of views:
28.1.1 Switching from the OS to the Craft Terminal access state Select the Supervision pull down menu. Then select the Requested option from the Access State cascading menu as shown in the following figure.
Fig. 106. Configuration of the Craft access state from the Equipment NE view in the OS mode
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
From the confirmation dialogue box that opens, you can confirm or cancel the Craft access operation using the Yes or No pushbutton. The request is sent up to the OS which accepts or refuses it. If the OS doesnt answer in a predefined time, it is assumed that the NE is in the Craft access state and can be managed by a Craft Terminal.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 167 / 296
28.1.2 Switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state Select the Supervision pull down menu. Then from the Access State cascading menu in Fig. 135. on page 197, select the OS option. From the confirmation dialogue box that opens, you can confirm or cancel the OS access operation. The NE is now managed by the OS. N.B. N.B. The key symbol icon on the management states of the NE view indicates whether the NE is managed by a craft terminal or by the OS. Local Craft Terminal access is denied on recovery phase after a loss of communication of the NE. When the communication with the NE is lost, the OS automatically recovers the communication and forces the state existing before the loss of communication (therefore, Craft Terminal access can be denied or granted).
28.2 Restart NE
The RESTART operation is a software reset and can be executed in normal traffic conditions. From the Supervision cascading menu, select the Restart NE option.
Fig. 107. Restart NE call The following dialogue box opens.
Fig. 108. Restart NE confirmation Click the OK button to confirm the restart N.E. operation Click the Cancel button to abort the restart N.E. operation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 168 / 296
28.3 SW key
From the Supervision cascading menu, select the SW key option.
In this screen the type of the key (stored in the flash card installed in the Main IDU unit) is shown.
Fig. 109. SW key screen
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 169 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
170 / 296
29 PROTECTION SCHEMES
N.B.
This menu is available in V.1.0.1 and V.1.0.2 only for the Radio application.
This domain is present in 1+1 configuration. This domain view consists of the following areas (Fig. 110. on page 171): Resource Tree Area: displays the radio ports sorted by channel number. Resource List Area: displays tabular informations about the selected resource in tree area. Resource Detail Area: displays, through tabbed windows, the properties done in list area. This area enable to perform the available functions for involved resource.
By clicking on the tree root displayed in Fig. 110. on page 171, the tree will be expanded according to protection schemes supported.
Fig. 110. Protection Schemes A single left click selection of an element tree causes the activation of the corresponding Graphical representation displayed in the Resource list area. An exemple of this mechanism is displayed in the following figure (Fig. 111. on page 172). Three 1+1 protection schemes have been implemented:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Mux protection: EPS protection in Tx side Radio protection: EPS protection in Rx side HST protection: Hot Standby protection
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 171 / 296
To see the current position of the switches enter the menu Diagnosis > Summary Block Diagram View (refer to para. 211.4 on page 196).
The Mux protection corresponds to the Switch Tx in Fig. 137. on page 199 or Fig. 138. on page 200 The Radio protection corresponds to the Switch Rx in Fig. 137. on page 199 or Fig. 138. on page 200 The HST protection is implemented in the ODU: one Transmitter is connected to the antenna (active), the other transmitter is in standby. Refer to Fig. 137. on page 199.
29.1 Mux Protection Management

The Equipment Protection Management is performed by selecting Mux Protection tree element. The following windows (Fig. 111. on page 172) allows a complete view of all Ne resource involved in the EPS protection: Schema Parameters Channels Parameters
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 111. Mux Protection
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 172 / 296
29.1.1 Schema Parameters The window Schema Parameters displays the parameters that can be modify.
The Schema parameters are: Protection Type: this parameter is defined at creation time and it is read only. The supported type is: 1+1, e.g. a working channel (Main) is protected by a protecting channel (Spare). Operation type: it defines if automatic restoration from protecting to protected channel is allowed (revertive mode) or inhibited (not revertive mode).
The operator choice for Operation Type will be applied by clicking on Apply button.
29.1.2 Commands To enter the Commands menu click on the Spare #0 element in the Tree view (Fig. 112. on page 173) or on the Main #1 element (Fig. 113. on page 174).
Fig. 112. Mux Protection Switch (Spare #0)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 173 / 296
Fig. 113. Mux Protection Switch (Main #1) The operator by the Craft Terminal can modify the state of the switch through commands Lockout, Forced and Manual. Lockout has higher priority than Forced: the activation forces in service Channel 1 (default channel), independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling ABN. Forced has higher priority than the automatic operation: the activation of this command forces in service Channel 0, independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling ABN. Automatic Switch is the normal operation condition: the position of the switch depends on the commands generated by the logic. Manual has the lowest priority: it is performed only if there are no alarms that can activate an automatic switch. It cannot be performed if Lockout or Forced commands are already activated. If this command is active, it will be removed by an incoming alarm. This command does not activate signaling ABN. Tab. 5. Command priority list Command Lockout Forced Automatic switch
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Priority 1 2 3 4
Manual N.B.
to release a previously activated command select None and click on Apply. 03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 174 / 296
ED
29.2 Radio Protection Management

The Radio Protection Management is performed selecting Radio Protection element tree.
The following windows (Fig. 114. on page 175) allows a complete view of all Ne resource involved in a RPS protection: Schema Parameters Channels Parameters
Fig. 114. Radio Protection View
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 175 / 296
29.2.1 Schema Parameter The window Schema Parameters displays the parameters that can be modify.
The Schema Parameters are: Protection Type field: defines the protection schema architecture: 1+1; Operation Type field: the possible values are revertive (automatic restoration allowed) or notRevertive (automatic restoration Inhibited).
29.2.2 Commands To enter the Commands menu click on the Spare #0 element in the Tree view (Fig. 115. on page 176) or on the Main #1 element (Fig. 116. on page 177).
Fig. 115. Radio Protection Switch (Spare #0)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 176 / 296
Fig. 116. Radio Protection Switch (Main #1) The operator by the Craft Terminal can modify the state of the switch through commands Lockout, Forced and Manual. Lockout has higher priority than Forced: the activation forces in service Channel 1 (default channel), independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling ABN. Forced has higher priority than the automatic operation: the activation of this command forces in service Channel 0, independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling ABN. Automatic Switch is the normal operation condition: the position of the switch depends on the commands generated by the logic. Manual has the lowest priority: it is performed only if there are no alarms that can activate an automatic switch. It cannot be performed if Lockout or Forced commands are already activated. If this command is active, it will be removed by an incoming alarm. This command does not activate signaling ABN. Tab. 6. Command priority list Command Lockout Forced Automatic switch
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Priority 1 2 3 4
Manual N.B.
ED
29.3 HST Transmission Protection Management

The Transmission Protection Management is performed selecting Transmission Protection element tree. The following windows (Fig. 117. on page 178) allows a complete view of all Ne resource involved in a TPS protection: Schema Parameters Channels Parameters
Fig. 117. Transmission Protection View
29.3.1 Schema Parameters The window Schema Parameters displays the parameters that can be modify. The Schema parameters are:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Protection Type: this parameter is defined at creation time and it is read only. The supported type are: 1+1 (onePlusOne) ,e.g. a working element is protected by one protecting unit. Operation type: it defines if automatic restoration from protecting to protected unit is allowed (revertive mode) or inhibited (not revertive mode).
The operator choice for Operation Type will be applied clicking on Apply button.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 178 / 296
29.3.2 Commands To enter the Commands menu click on the Spare #0 element (Fig. 118. on page 179) or on the Main #1 element (Fig. 119. on page 180) in the Tree view.
Fig. 118. Tx Protection Commands (Spare #0)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 179 / 296
Fig. 119. Tx Protection Commands (Main #1) The operator by the Craft Terminal can modify the state of the switch through commands Lockout, Forced and Manual. Lockout has higher priority than Forced: the activation connects to the antenna Transmitter 1 (default transmitter), independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling ABN. Forced has higher priority than the automatic operation: the activation of this command connects to the antenna Transmitter 0, independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling ABN. Automatic Switch is the normal operation condition: the position of the switch depends on the commands generated by the logic. Manual has the lowest priority: it is performed only if there are no alarms that can activate an automatic switch. It cannot be performed if Lockout or Forced commands are already activated. If this command is active, it will be removed by an incoming alarm. This command does not activate signaling ABN. Tab. 7. Command priority list Command Lockout Forced Automatic switch
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Priority 1 2 3 4
Manual N.B.
ED
210 LOOPBACKS
The functions described in this section allow to perform the test operations.
This domain view consists of the following areas: Resource Tree Area: displays the object on which the loopbacks can be performed, sorted by number. Resource Filter Area: display the possible filters to apply to loopback search. Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the loopback supported by the resource selected in tree area. Resource Detail Area: displays, through tabbed windows, the properties done in list area. This area enable to perform the available functions for involved resource.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 181 / 296
210.1 Available Loopbacks

N.B. Tab. 8. shows the loopbacks performed on the local NE, which activation does not cause the loss of the supervision (UP) of the remote NE and the loopbacks, which activation will cause the loss of the supervision (DOWN) of the remote NE.
Tab. 8. Loopbacks on the local NE CH MAIN (1+0) system TRIBUTARIES IDUCABLE ODUCABLE R.F. TRIB. FE TRIB. NE CH SPARE (1+1) system with Spare lockout TRIBUTARIES IDUCABLE ODUCABLE R.F. TRIB. FE TRIB. NE CH MAIN (1+1) system with Spare lockout TRIBUTARIES IDUCABLE ODUCABLE R.F. TRIB. FE TRIB. NE CH SPARE (1+1) system with Main forced TRIBUTARIES IDUCABLE ODUCABLE R.F. TRIB. FE TRIB. NE CH MAIN (1+1) system with Main forced TRIBUTARIES IDUCABLE ODUCABLE R.F.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
UP for nxE1/DS1;
DOWN for E3/DS3 DOWN DOWN DOWN UP UP
UP for nxE1/DS1; UP UP UP UP UP UP for nxE1/DS1;
DOWN for E3/DS3
UP for nxE1/DS1;
UP for nxE1/DS1; UP UP UP UP UP
DOWN for E3/DS3
TRIB. FE TRIB. NE
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 182 / 296
210.1.1 1+0 FSO Loopbacks
CT IDU
1 2 4 5
FSO ODU
6 7
FSO ODU
IDU
3
TRIB
MUX/ DEMUX
MODEM
OPT. TxRx
OPT. TxRx
MODEM
MUX/ DEMUX
TRIB
Fig. 120. 1+0 FSO available loopbacks Tab. 9. 1+0 FSO loopbacks No. Loopback name E1/DS1 Port#xx CT selection in the Resourse Tree Area Tributaries Ref. to Fig. Fig. 122. Fig. 123. Location Loopback type External line Note Input loopback tributary level at
Near End
E1/DS1 Port#xx
Channel 1
Fig. 121. Fig. 123.
Near End
External line
Loopback toward the remote station at tributary level. This loopback can be activated in the local station only. Loopback in the remote station at tributary level Loopback at the IDU output at aggregate level Loopback at the ODU input at aggregate level Loopback between the Modulator output and Demodulator input Optical loopback at the ODU level
E1/DS1 Port#xx
Channel 1
Fig. 121.
Far End
Internal
IDU cable
Channel 1
Fig. 121. Fig. 123. Fig. 121. Fig. 123.
Near End
Internal
ODU FSO cable
Channel 1
Near End
Internal
ODU FSO IF #1 ODU FSO optical
Channel 1
Fig. 121. Fig. 123. Fig. 121. Fig. 123.
Near End
Internal IF
Channel 1
Near End
Internal
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 183 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Fig. 121. Channel 1 Loopback View
03
Fig. 122. Tributaries Loopback View
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
184 / 296
In the Resource List Area are listed all the loopbacks which can be performed. In this area the following information is given:
Channel: the number of the channel (channel 1 only) Type Interface: the type of interface in which a loopback can be performed. Location: the station in which the loopback is performed (Near End/Far End) Type: the type of the loopback (Internal/Internal IF/External Line) Modality: the type of the loopback (Loop and Continue only) Activation: the activation status of a loopback (Active/Not Active)
In Fig. 123. on page 185 is given the association of all the possible loopbacks and their positions in the block diagram of the equipment provided by the Summary Block Diagram View option, available in the Diagnosis menu.
IDU CABLE
6 ODU FSO IF#1
1 Tributaries (External Line)
5 ODU FSO CABLE
ODU FSO Optical
2 Channel (External Line)
Fig. 123. 1+0 FSO Loopback types

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 185 / 296
210.1.2 1+0 Radio Loopbacks
CT IDU
1 2 4 5
ODU
6
ODU
IDU
3
TRIB
MUX/ DEMUX
MODEM
RF
RF
MODEM
MUX/ DEMUX
TRIB
Fig. 124. 1+0 Radio available loopbacks
Tab. 10. 1+0 Radio loopbacks No. Loopback name E1/DS1 Port#xx CT selection in the Resourse Tree Area Tributaries Ref. to Fig. Fig. 126. Fig. 127. Location Loopback type External line Note Input loopback tributary level at
Near End
E1/DS1 Port#xx
Channel 1
Fig. 125. Fig. 127.
Near End
External line
Loopback toward the remote station at tributary level. This loopback can be activated in the local station only. Loopback in the remote station at tributary level Loopback at the IDU output at aggregate level Loopback at the ODU input at aggregate level RF local loopback (Note 1)
E1/DS1 Port#xx
Channel 1
Fig. 125.
Far End
Internal
IDU cable
Channel 1
Fig. 125. Fig. 127. Fig. 125. Fig. 127. Fig. 125. Fig. 127.
Near End
Internal
ODU cable
Channel 1
Near End
Internal
Radio port
Channel 1
Near End
Internal
Note 1: Before activating this loopback the Remote Tx must be muted (Menu Radio > Configuration)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 186 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
187 / 296
IDU CABLE
ODU CABLE
6 Radio port (RF loop)
Channel (External Line)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 127. 1+0 Radio Loopback types
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 188 / 296
210.1.3 1+1 Radio Loopbacks
CT IDU
1 2 4 5
ODU
6
ODU
IDU
3
TRIB
MUX/ DEMUX
MODEM
RF
RF
MODEM
MUX/ DEMUX
TRIB
Fig. 128. 1+1 Radio available loopbacks
Tab. 11. 1+1 Radio loopbacks No. Loopback name E1/DS1 Port#xx CT selection in the Resourse Tree Area Tributaries Ref. to Fig. Fig. 130. Fig. 131. Location Loopback type External line Note Input loopback tributary level at
Near End
E1/DS1 Port#xx
Channel 0 or 1
Fig. 129. Fig. 131.
Near End
External line
Loopback toward the remote station at tributary level. This loopback can be activated in the local station only. Loopback in the remote station at tributary level Loopback at the IDU output at aggregate level Loopback at the ODU input at aggregate level RF local loopback (Note 1)
E1/DS1 Port#xx
Channel 0 or1
Fig. 129. Fig. 131. Fig. 129. Fig. 131. Fig. 129. Fig. 131. Fig. 129. Fig. 131.
Far End
Internal
IDU cable
Channel 0 or 1
Near End
Internal
ODU cable
Channel 0 or 1
Near End
Internal
Radio port
Channel 0 or 1
Near End
Internal
Note 1: Before activating this loopback the Remote Tx must be muted (Menu Radio > Configuration).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 189 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
190 / 296
5 ODU IDU CABLE CABLE
6 Radio port (RF loop)
2 Channel (External Line)
Fig. 131. 1+1 Radio Loopback types

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 191 / 296
210.2 How to activate a loopback

N.B. For the loopbacks under Ch. 0 and Ch.1 option must force/lockout all switches to related Channel; for the loopbacks Tributaries > DSx port#y must only force the radio switch Channel 0 or lockout to Channel 1 independently.
To activate a loopback: [1] [2] [3] Select the loopback to be activated inside of the of the loopback screen in the USM as shown in Fig. 132. on page 192. Once the loopback is selected click ACTIVE in the configuration menu and APPLY. The Loopback is now ACTIVE.
Fig. 132. Loopback activation
WARNING:
When the Loopback commands start the Craft Terminal is not frozen. Before to set another command is recommended to wait 120 to 160 seconds minimun.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 192 / 296
210.3 How to remove a loopback

To deactivate loopbacks use the folllowing steps:
[1] [2] [3] N.B.
Select the loopback to be deactivated inside of the loopback screen in the Fig. 133. on page 193. Once the loopback is selected clik NOT ACTIVE in the configuration menu and APPLY. The loopback is now deactivated. If a force or lockout command was used during the activation, ensure that the command is removed after the test.
Fig. 133. Loopback removing
WARNING:
When the Loopback commands start the Craft Terminal is not frozen. Before to set another command is recommended to wait 120 to 160 seconds minimun.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 193 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
194 / 296
211 DIAGNOSIS
In the Diagnosis menu four options are available as shown in Fig. 134.
Fig. 134. Diagnosis menu
211.1 Log Browsing

In the Diagnosis pulldown menu, select the Log Browsing option. The proposed options: Select the Alarm Log option to access the Alarm Log file. The Alarm Log windows opens, permitting to analyze all the alarms stored in the NE. Refer to the ELB Operators Handbook. Select the Event Log option to access the Event Log file. The Event Log windows opens, permitting to analyze all the events stored in the NE. Refer to the ELB Operators Handbook. Software Trace Log option is reserved to the Alcatel technicians.
211.2 Remote Inventory

This screen is a readonly screen, which shows all the information on the equipment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 195 / 296
211.3 Abnormal Condition List

The Abnormal Condition List option in the Diagnosis menu displays all the abnormal conditions (i.e. the manual operations) currently active in the NE. The abnormal conditions can be: Switch commands Forced or Lockout Loopback Tx power manual operation Tx muting (manual or automatic) ODU service kit connected FSO laser muting
211.4 Summary Block Diagram View

The Summary Block Diagram View of the Diagnosis menu displays a global logical view (strictly related to the physical implementation) highlighting a synthesis of all the alarms and statuses present in the system (ODU+IDU). This window also shows a logical view of the signal flowing through the functional block and switches. Line (and arrow) trace changes in compliance with the current switch status. By clicking on the objects of the drawing shown in the figure the operator can navigate to the specific view to perform maintenance operation (for example specific alarm details, equipment details, manual switches, loopback (L), performance monitoring (P). The Summary Block Diagram View depends on the configuration: 1+0 FSO (see Fig. 135. on page 197) 1+0 Radio (see Fig. 136. on page 198) 1+1 HST Radio (see Fig. 137. on page 199) 1+1 FD Radio (see Fig. 138. on page 200)
In detail, it is possible to: navigate from Alarm indicator to related Alarm Synthesis; navigate from External Point indicator to External Point view; navigate from Switch indicator to related Protection Scheme view; navigate from Loopback indicator to specific Loopback view; for example, by clicking on (L) indicator of main board (Ch#1) the operator can navigate to loopback view for PDH tributaries; navigate from Performance indicator to specific Performance view; for example, by clicking on (P) indicator (line side) the operator can navigate to Current Data view; navigate from ODU box to the radio view with automatic selection of the related channel.
To refresh the screen press the Refresh button. N.B. N.B. Loopback indicator: yellow letter L means active loop. Performance indicator: yellow letter P means active performance. In the 1+1 configuration the current position of the switches is also shown.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 196 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Fig. 135. Summary Block Diagram View: 1+0 FSO
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
197 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Fig. 136. Summary Block Diagram View: 1+0 Radio
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
198 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
Fig. 137. Summary Block Diagram View: 1+1 HST Radio
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
199 / 296
Fig. 138. Summary Block Diagram View: 1+1 FD Radio By pressing the Refresh button the refresh of the screen takes place (active loopback and performance and position of the switch).
211.5 Current Configuration View

This screen is a readonly screen, which shows the current configuration of the NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 200 / 296
212 PERFORMANCE MONITORING

This chapter describes the functions to provide Performance Monitoring management. It explains the procedures that the operator must perform in order to activate a PM process.
212.1 General information on the performance monitoring process

The performance monitoring (PM) gives indication on the quality of the service. Quality of service PM is performed in accordance with G.826 and G.784. It is assumed that the quality of the single tributary (E1, T1, ) can be derived from the quality of the aggregate signal, therefore no dedicated quality of service PM is foreseen on the single tributaries. Considering one section (see below), one current register is for 15 min report and one for 24 h report; 96 history data can be stored for 15 min report and 8 history data for 24 h report. N.B. The 15 min Performance Monitoring data are stored in the History Data report only if errors have been occurred. The 24 h Performance Monitoring data are always stored in the History Data report.
The radio section monitored is: Radio Hop Section: the section between two radio stations inside the protection section
PROPR. FRAMING
FEC ENCODE
MODEM RF
MODEM RF
FEC DECODE
PROPR. FRAMING
Radio Hop (before the switch)
Fig. 139. Radio section The counters supported are the following: Errored Seconds Severly Errored Seconds Background Block Error Unavailable Seconds
The primitives used for the hop section quality monitoring is the ReedSolomon (RS) decoder (block size: 2040 bits). The following table provides, for each frame structure, the main features useful to define a SES. Tab. 12. SES Thresholds E3 Gross bit rate [MHz] RS Blocks number/sec. SES Threshold (Note 1) 39,168 19200 5760 16E1 39,168 19200 5760 8E1 19,584 9600 2880 4E1 9,792 4800 1440 2E1 4,896 2400 720 DS3 57,120 28000 8400 16DS1 28,560 14000 4200 8DS1 14,280 7000 2100 4DS1 7,140 3500 1050
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(Note 1) Note that according to ITUT G.826 a second is declared Severely Errored Second if it is a second period with more than 30 % of errored blocks or at least one defect.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 201 / 296
The flow chart shown below illustrates the recognition of anomalies, defects, errored blocks, ES and SES according to ITUT G.826 (12/2002).
Monitored second
Defects?
Yes
No No
Anomalies?
Yes Yes SES (and therefore an ES)
%EB 30? ES (but not a SES)
No No Path in available State? Yes cES = cES + 1 N
Path in available State? Yes cES = cES + 1
cBBE = cBBE + EB(s)
cSES = cSES + 1
T131379098
End
Fig. 140. Anomalies, defects, errored blocks, ES and SES according to ITUT G.826
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 202 / 296
212.2 Performance menu

The performance view allows the user to activate and monitor the PM process on the selected object.
This domain view consists of the following areas (Fig. 141. on page 203): Resource Tree Area: displays the threshold for measurement and the object monitoring sorted by channel number. Resource List Area: displays the PM management for the selected resource in the tree area.
Fig. 141. Performance View The performance reports can be of 2 different types: 15 minutes 24 hours
The following description explains the functions to provide the PM process with a granularity period of 15 min. The same functions are provided for 24h PM process. The PM are only of HOP type. The current report can be seen (and configured) and the history PM log can be seen.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 203 / 296
With reference to Fig. 141. on page 203 to see (and configure) the current report: [1] [2] [3] [4] click on the channel (0 or 1) (in 1+0 configuration channel 1 only)
click on HOP click on the desired granularity (15 m or 24 h) click on CD (Current Data).
With reference to Fig. 141. on page 203 to see an history log: [1] [2] [3] [4] click on the channel (0 or 1) (in 1+0 configuration channel 1 only) click on HOP click on the desired granularity (15 m or 24 h) click on the desired HD (History Data).
To each PM can be associated a threshold table. To associate a threshold table click on HOP in the Resourse Tree Area. The screen in Fig. 142. will appear.
Fig. 142. Threshold table association screen In this screen the threshold (1 or 2) and an Alarm Profile can be associated to the report.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To associate an Alarm Profile click on the selection box and selet one of the Alarm Profiles available.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 204 / 296
212.3 CD (Current Data)

The window displayed in Fig. 143. on page 205 allows to start and to read the 15min PM report and 24h PM report.
Fig. 143. Current Data View
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 205 / 296
212.3.1 CD parameters The fields displayed in the upper part of Fig. 143. on page 205 allow the operator to check and manage the parameter of the current data collection. Suspect interval shows whether the current data are suspect or not. Elapsed Time field (readonly) displays the elapsed time in the current interval of monitoring. End Period: display time of the PM in the graphical description and in the tabular description in the upper part of the screen. By pressing the Refresh button this time changes. Max Interval supp.: max. number of intervals (reports) which can be suppressed in the History because they dont have errors. Num. Interval supp.: number of intervals (reports) suppressed in the History because they dont have errors.
212.3.2 CD Counters The fields and buttons displayed in the lower part of Fig. 143. on page 205 (Counters Area) allow the management of performance events. In the left part of Counters Area, there is a graphical description of the event counter value: BBE (Errored block), ES (Errored second), SES (Severely Errored Second), UAS (Unavailable second). N.B. these values refer to the last refresh performed by pressing the Refresh button.
In the right part of Fig. 143. on page 205, there are button choice to perform action on the current data collection: Reset button resets the data collection and related counters. Start button starts the counters for the data collection, when the CD has been stopped. Refresh button makes a refresh of the counters. Stop button stops the counters for the data collection, when the CD has been started.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 206 / 296
212.4 HD (History Data)

The PM process monitors the parameters during a specified interval (i.e. 15min) and stores their values in history data. A History Data collection is created automatically at the end of each time interval of Current Data and deleted when the relative CD is deleted.
212.4.1 HD Parameters The table displayed on the following window (Fig. 144. on page 207) collects the history data for a related PM report.
Fig. 144. History Data The table columns hold the value of following parameters:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
End Period: End period of the relevant report Elapsed time: elapsed time in the related interval Suspect interval: this field describes whether the History Data is suspect or not. Counters: the last columns hold the counters value (BBE, ES, SES, UAS).
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 207 / 296
212.5 Threshold Data

This section describes how to see or change the threshold tables assigned to PM counters. To view the available threshold for PM process, the operator must select the Thresholds Tables node tree in the Resource Tree Area of the Performance View. By clicking on the threshold table on the view area the parameters of the 2 tables will appears (Fig. 145. on page 208).
Fig. 145. Thresholds Tables By clicking on threshold 1 or 2 in the Resourse List Area the screen in Fig. 146. on page 209 will appear. In the upper part of Fig. 146. on page 209, the Name field displays the name assigned to the threshold table. In the lower part of Fig. 146. on page 209, low and high threshold for each counter is shown. To change them, the operator must edit the new values in the table fields and click on the Apply button.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 208 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Fig. 146. Threshold table configuration
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
209 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
210 / 296
213 SW DOWNLOAD 213.1 Server Access Configuration

This menu allows to configure the FTP server to be used to download the SWP to the NE. N.B. The complete procedure to download the SWP to the NE is shown in para. 12.3 on page 60.
Fig. 147. Server access configuration screen User Id and Password are the login information to access the FTP server. In the Address field write the IP address of the FTP server. In the Port field write the port to be used and in the Root Directory field write the directory into which the software has been downloaded. By clicking on the Use System Default button a screen will appear showing the default configuration. The CT is the default FTP server with the following parameters:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
User Id: ftp Password: ftp Address: IP address of the F interface or IP address of the Ethernet interface, if present. Port: 15,000 the System Default can be changed by writing different values in the fields and then by clicking on button OK.
N.B.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 211 / 296
213.2 Init SW Download

Through this menu software is downloaded to the NE in order to upgrade the NE software version. To start download select the desired software version and click on the Init download button. N.B. This screen displays the software packages previously stored through the menu Supervision > Files Administration > Software Administration available in the NES menu.
The Forced check box can be used to force download (i.e. the complete description file is downloaded to the NE). If the Forced download is not selected, the system shall first proceed to compare the software to be downloaded with the software present in the NE. Then only the differences are downloaded.
Fig. 148. Init Software Download screen
When the SW download starts a screen, showing the in progress operation of the download, appears. Download is aborted when the Abort button is pressed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 212 / 296
213.3 SW Status
This menu allows to display the information of the software installed in the NE.
The following information is displayed: Name: software name Version: software version Operational state: enabled or disabled Current status: committed or standby
By clicking on the Software Units Status button the screen of Fig. 149. on page 213 opens, giving additional information on the software package.
Fig. 149. SW Status screen
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 213 / 296
The following information is displayed on the screen: EC: software on the Equipment Controller
OC_R: software on the ODU Controller (Radio) OC_F: software on the ODU Controller (FSO)
Fig. 150. SW Unit Status screen The Flash card, which stores the NE software, contains 2 banks. The 2 banks can store 2 different software versions. One bank will be committed (active) and the other bank will be standby. N.B. The second bank will appear when a new software package has been downloaded the first time.
During download, necessary to update the software version, the download file is automatically stored in the standby bank. To activate the new version first check the operational status of the standby bank. If the status is enabled (this means that download took place without errors) select Activation or Forced Activation in the Software Management Action field and click on the Apply Action button. By selecting Forced Activation the bank to be activated is forced to restart.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
By selecting Activation the bank to be activated restarts only if the content of the two banks differ.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 214 / 296
SECTION 3: AWY/FSO MAINTENANCE

SECTION CONTENT Chapter 31 Maintenance introduction Chapter 32 Troubleshooting
PAGE 216 217
The symbol
Referenced handbook P/Ns are given in para.E.2 on page 279 of this handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 215 / 296
31 MAINTENANCE INTRODUCTION
This section is the 9400AWY/FSO Maintenance Manual; it describes mainly the NE troubleshooting based on the use of the Craft Terminal. It applies to 9400AWY SWP Rel.1.0. The document that should be read before starting this document is: 9400AWY Technical Handbooks, section MAINTENANCE or: 9400FSO Technical Handbooks, section MAINTENANCE 9400AWY Rel.1.0 Technical Handbook and 9400FSO R.1.0 Technical Handbook R.1.0. N.B. In particular, knowing the contents of section MAINTENANCE of Technical Handbook is a must.
1320CT Basic Operators Handbook V.3.0.1
The maintenance procedures consist of the following steps: PC Maintenance. See para.31.1 herebelow. Problems with the Craft Terminal PC (shutdown and restart ). See para.31.2 herebelow. Corrective Maintenance (Troubleshooting). See Chapter 32 on page 217.
31.1 Maintenance of the PC

With regard to the PC maintenance, refer to the constructors documentation.
31.2 Problems with THE Craft Terminal

This procedure describes how to shutdown and restart the PC should the Craft Terminal SoftWare Product not be working properly or not responding to the operators commands. In order to shutdown the PC execute the command : Start > Shutdown A window (Windows NT Security user dialog) is displayed. It permits to shutdown the computer or restart it. The same window is displayed pressing he keys <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <Del> simultaneously. N.B. In the case this procedure is unsuccesful, carry out the checks indicated in: 9400AWY or 9400FSO Technical Handbooks section MAINTENANCE, chapter SECOND LEVEL MAINTENANCE paragraph TROUBLESHOOTINGPROBLEMS WITH THE CRAFT TERMINAL
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 216 / 296
32 TROUBLESHOOTING 32.1 Purpose of this procedure

Troubleshooting involves detection, location and correction of the failures occurred in the equipment and replacement of the defective parts.
32.2 Corrective Maintenance general flowchart

As depicted in Fig. 151. herebelow, troubleshooting via Craft Terminal is just a step inside the Corrective Maintenance process. START Alarm acknowledgment and attending (para...)
TroubleShooting starting with visual indications (para......) Other measures TroubleShooting via Craft Terminal. Identification of a unit to be replaced.
Unit replacement in the IDU (para...).
ODU replacement (para...)
System check via Craft Terminal Try again with another unit N Fault repaired ?
Y If possible, restore replaced unit in the system and perform system check via Craft Terminal, to verify that is really faulty N Fixed fault ? Y Restore spare part in the system and perform system check via Craft Terminal Send back faulty unit to Repair Centre together with Repair Form compiled (para......) END Fig. 151. Corrective Maintenance general flowchart
Possible intermittent failure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
For detailed information regarding the whole Corrective Maintenance procedure, please refer to: 9400AWY or 9400FSO Technical Handbooks, section MAINTENANCE chapter SECOND LEVEL MAINTENANCE, paragraph CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 217 / 296
32.3 Troubleshooting organization

The troubleshooting procedure is carried out with the help of some tables, reported hereinafter. Anyway this method does not deal with the following issues (which are to be dealt with otherwise): faulty electronic alarm indication, processing and detection circuits faulty wiring (backpanel, connectors, etc.)
The following interfaces are present on the equipment for troubleshooting purposes: Ethernet interface for the Telecommunication Management Network ( TMN ) F interface for the Craft Terminal (Local or Remote) LEDs located on the NEs units.
Usually, maintenance is firstly done via software (TMN or Remote Craft Terminal) to locate the faulty equipment and the faulty unit or the faulty path and then on site to physically correct the trouble.
Maintenance can be done: from a TMN network management center from a Remote Craft Terminal (RCT) management center on site.
TMN network management center: by means of the TMN, the maintenance technician can see the alarms generated by each equipment of the managed network (see the relevant TMN handbooks). Remote craft terminal: the operator, connected to a local NE, can remotely manage and troubleshoot a network composed of max 128 NEs, including itself. This handbook applies. On site : the operator is on site in case : 1) 2) 3) 4) the equipment is not managed by a TMN or by a Remote Craft terminal (RCT). the equipment is not reachable by the remote manager (TMN or RCT) and therefore is isolated. link problems are present. the trouble has been located and a physical replacement is necessary.
In cases 1 ) , 2 ), 3 ), the alarmed equipment is checked by means of the local Craft Terminal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 218 / 296
The NE is provided with LEDs which indicate: Centralized Equipment Alarms:

All alarms detected on the units are collected by the MAIN unit, which delivers centralized indications (by means of LEDs on the front coverplate). Specifically: Red LED: detection of a MAJOR (URGENT) alarm. Red LED: detection of a MINOR (NOT URGENT) alarm. Yellow LED: alarm condition ATTENDED. Red LED: detection of a LDI (problem in the local equipment). Red LED: detection of an RDI (problem in the remote equipment).
In the case of a MAJOR or MINOR alarm, after locating the alarmed unit, the alarm condition can be attended by pressing the alarm storing push button on the front panel of the MAIN unit. This condition causes on the front coverplate: yellow LED ATTENDED to light up red LEDs MINOR and MAJOR to turn off (free to accept other alarms) If both LEDs are on, the Attend command should be given twice : one to attend the MINOR alarm and one to attend the MAJOR alarm.
The troubleshooting operation is done by means of the Craft Terminal, and of the optical indicators (LEDs) present on the NE. The Craft Terminal is connected to the relative connector on the front coverplate (F interface) of the MAIN unit. The Craft Terminal applications provide detailed information on the alarm state thus facilitating fault location and subsequent removal as indicated in para. 32.4 on page 220. To correctly execute the troubleshooting operations the technician must know the equipment configuration (see Equipment applications on the Craft Terminal). The following tables should be also consulted when the unit LEDs flash; as a matter of fact, the flashing condition might be due to external alarm causes usually, related to line problems.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 219 / 296
32.4 Troubleshooting by means of the Craft Terminal

Troubleshooting proceeds by checking the detailed information on the NE alarm by using the Craft Terminal. The information on the NE alarm will be mainly obtained by means of the Craft Terminal through the Alarm tab panel data. The troubleshooting procedure is the following. a) Look at the active alarms on the Control Panel always present on the window (which summarizes all the NE alarms). Tab. 13. on page 221 describes the meanings of these alarms/statuses and its respective maintenance actions. In case of alarm, access the Alarm tab panel for troubleshooting. Para 32.4.2 on page 222 explains how to see the alarms.
b)
MAJOR alarm indicates a severe alarm that could affect the current traffic (interrupt or degrade). Hence, a prompt intervention is necessary to restore the regular operating condition of the equipment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 220 / 296
32.4.1 Alarm synthesis indication The following troubleshooting table pertains to the alarm and status synthesis given in all the screens.
Tab. 13. Alarm Synthesis indication Mnemonic CRI MAJ MIN WNG IND EXTP EQP TRNS SUP Alarm / Status Description Critical alarm Major (Urgent) alarm Minor (Not urgent) alarm Warning alarm Indeterminate alarm External Point (Housekeeping alarm) Equipment alarm Transmission alarm Supervision state Maintenance Synthesis of alarms that needs immediate troubleshooting (typical: NE isolation). NB1. Synthesis of alarms troublshooting. NB1. that needs immediate
Synthesis of alarms for which a deferred intervent can be decided. NB1. Synthesis of alarms due to failure of other NE in the network. NB1. Synthesis of alarms not associated with the previous severities. Not operative. Check the relevant station alarm associated with the input housekeeping indication. Synthesis of alarms of the Equipment domain. Synthesis of alarms of the Transmission domain. GREEN LED: NE is under supervision. BROWN LED: NE is not under supervision. Used in the OS. GREEN LED: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has the OS permission to manage the NE (granted). CYAN LED: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has not the OS permission to manage the NE (denied). GREEN LED: Identifies the Enable operational state of the connection between NE and Craft Terminal ( SDH service link up ). RED LED: Identified the Disable operational state of the connection between NE and Craft Terminal ( service link down ). GREEN LED: Normal operating condition. CYAN LED: Detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition. Type: switch forcing. Alignment status of the SH MIB respect to the equipment MIB.
Local Access state
COM
NE reachable/unreachable
AC
Abnormal Condition
ALI
Alignment
NB1:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Alarm Profile can modify the assignment of each alarm root to the various synthesis.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 221 / 296
32.4.2 Details on alarms / statuses The troubleshooting proceed by checking the detailed information on the NE alarm by using the Craft Terminal. To display the active alarms (refer to Fig. 152. on page 222): It is also possible to analyze the detailed alarms present on each TP of the Port views of the NE. [1] [2] [3] [4] Select the Equipment tab panel. Select one node (or subnode) in the Resourse Tree Area to check if some alarms are active. Select the Alarm tab panel in the Resourse Detail Area. If the node has subnodes put a tick in the Include alarms from subnodes field to display the alarms active also in the subnodes.
[1]
[2]
[3] [4]
Fig. 152. Active alarm screem Detailed information of some alarm are supplied.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 222 / 296
The following table summarizes the information obtained in the Alarm view, starting from the left column. Tab. 14. Alarm information, general description
TITLE Severity Event time Entity Probable Cause Managed Object Class
DESCRIPTION severity associated to the alarm and assigned in the Alarm Profile time of the generation of the alarm entity involved in the alarm probable cause of the alarm class of the alarm
The information supplied helps the operator during the troubleshooting operations. Tab. 15. on page 225 supplies general information on the alarm meanings and on the respective maintenance actions to be done bases on the information given in the applications. The maintenance action must take account of the board where the alarm is detected. The Housekeeping alarms are referred to the input external point relevant to the Housekeeping signals. They are available to the customer by connecting them to a dedicated subrack connector.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 223 / 296
32.5 Description of alarms and of probable causes

The information provided helps the operator during troubleshooting operations. N.B. UNIT REPLACEMENT After having identified a unit to be replaced, in order to carry out the replacement correctly, please refer to: 9400AWY or 9400FSO Technical Handbooks, section MAINTENANCE chapter SECOND LEVEL MAINTENANCE, paragraph UNIT REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES WARNING: Before to disconnect the cable IDUODU of N.E., the corresponding IDU unit must be always turnoff.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 224 / 296
Tab. 15. General issues of the alarm meanings and their respective maintenance actions ALARM
MEANING
MAINTENANCE ACTION
AIS ATPC loop problem Battery fail High BER Dem fail Dem LOS Cable LOS Incompatible Frequency Incompatible PTX Internal Communication Problem LAN failure
AIS detection on the tributary in Tx Check the 2 Mbit connected side or Rx side equipment Problem on the ATPC loop Problem on the Station Battery Excessive BER Communication problem Check the Station Battery Excessive errors. Check the link (propagation problem)
Demodulator failure affecting the Replace the ODU demodulated signal Loss of the incoming signal at the Check the link (propagation demodulator input problem) Problem on the cable or on the ODU Replace the ODU; if the alarm is still active replace the cable.
Frequency setting incompatible with Change the frequency or change the the ODU P/N ODU Output power out of the limits ODU not responding Replace the ODU Press the Reset pushbutton on the MAIN unit. If the alarm is still active, replace the ODU Check the LAN connection or replace the MAIN unit Check the correct connection of the cable between the IDU and the relevant ODU. If the connection is correct, check the link (propagation problem)
LAN problem
Link Identifier Mismatch
Mismatch on the link identifier
Loss Of Frame (E1/DS1)
LOF at the Tx tributary input or at Rx tributary output (with framed Check the E1/DS1 connected equipment or the line tributary) or LOF of the Rx aggregate signal LOF of the Rx aggregate signal LOS at the Tx tributary input Low BER at the Rx side Check the link (errors) Check the line Check the link (propagation problem)
Loss Of Frame (Aggregate signal) Loss Of Signal Low BER

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Mod fail
Internal modulator failure affecting Replace the ODU the modulated signal
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 225 / 296
Tab. 15. General issues of the alarm meanings and their respective maintenance actions ALARM Mod LOS Remote Defect Indication Replaceable Unit Problem Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch MEANING No signal at the modulator input Alarm active in the remote station Problem on a replaceable unit MAINTENANCE ACTION Investigate by using the loopback facilities with the CT. Check the remote station Replace the unit
Mismatch between the installed unit Change the unit configuration or and the sw configured unit change the unit Install the unit Check the link (propagation problem) Check the link (propagation problem)
Replaceable Unit Type Missing No unit in a configured slot Rx Fail (Radio alarm) Rx LOS (FSO alarm) Threshold Cross Transmitter degraded (FSO alarm) Transmitter Failure (FSO alarm) Tx Fail (Radio alarm) Unconfigured Equipment Present Version Mismatch Housekeeping No RF received signal No Optical received signal
Performance threshold has been Errors on the link crossed Laser degraded (output power 3 dB Minor alarm below the nominal power) Transmitter failure Transmitter failure Replace the ODU if the alarm is present at the same time on LASER 1 and LASER Replace the ODU
Unit present in an unconfigured slot Configure the unit Mismatch on the software version Download the software version between CT software and equipment software Active input housekeeping Check the housekeeping
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 226 / 296
SECTION 4: SWP DESCRIPTION AND VERSIONS

This section gives information on the Software Packages this handbook refers to, and that are both independent and independent on the specific SWP Versions. SECTION CONTENT INFORMATION INDEPENDENT ON THE SPECIFIC SWP VERSIONS Chapter 41 SWP REG.9400AWY R.1.0 description This chapter gives information on the Software Packages this handbook refers to, and that are independent on the specific SWP Version: commercial information (SWP and Software Licences P/Ns). INFORMATION ON THE SPECIFIC SWP VERSIONS These chapters give operative information regarding the Software Package Version 1.0.x, starting from version V1.0.0: requirements (PC and equipment Firmware), SW Package Identification, SW Package Components, ECT SW SubComponent, NE MIB Compatibility, new features, restrictions and known problems. Chapter 42 SWP REG.9400AWY R.1.0 V.1.0.0 specific information N.B. Version 1.0.0 manages the Radio application only (1+0 configuration). Chapter 43 SWP REG.9400AWY R.1.0 V.1.0.1 specific information N.B. Version 1.0.1 manages the Radio application (1+0 and 1+1 configurations) and the FSO application. Chapter 44 SWP REG.9400AWY R.1.0 V.1.0.2 specific information 231 PAGE
229
235 239
The symbol
points out references to other handbooks.
Referenced handbook P/Ns are given in Appendix E on page 273.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 227 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
228 / 296
41 SWP 9400AWY R.1.0 DESCRIPTION

This chapter gives commercial information regarding the Software Packages this handbook refers to, i.e. the SWP and Software Licences P/Ns.
41.1 General
The software products are distributed by Alcatel in a CDROM. In this CDROM are contained: Software packages for NE management by means of the craft terminal Software package of the NE, to be installed in the NE or update the NE (by means of download function)
The software package used for management allows the dialogue between craft terminal and NE, to realize all the functions of the NE and EMLULS ). The software package used for updating the NE must be installed on the PC and then downloaded on the NE, thus following product evolution. Alcatel typically offers several software licences on the software product. They are referred both to the Network Element software features and to the Craft Terminal software features.
41.2 Software product list and part numbers

Every Software Product is identified by a denomination and a part number and is distributed by a CDROM with the same identifiers, listed on the following table: Tab. 16. Software products part numbers Name SWP 9400 AWY R.1.0 CDROM N.B. 1 ANV Part Number 3DB 04798 AAAA Factory Part Number 415.201.017 Y N.B. 1
Software Package associated to LCT or RCT SW Licence ( For AWY/FSO ULS NEs). See para.41.3 on page 230 for additional information.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 229 / 296
41.3 Software licence list and part numbers

Every Software licence is identified by a denomination and a part number, listed on the following table. Tab. 17. Software licence part numbers Name SWLULS R1.0 FEE SWLLCT 9400 AWY R1.0 FEE SWLRCT 9400 AWY R1.0 FEE N.B. 1 2 ANV Part Number 3DB 05638 AAAA 3DB 04811 AAAA 3DB 04812 AAAA Factory Part Number 700.500.050 P 700.500.028 D 700.500.029 E N.B. 1, 3 2, 2 3
Licence for Network Element software features (one per Transceiver): Licence alternative for Craft Terminal software features: SWLLCT: local Craft Terminal functionality SWLRCT: remote Craft Terminal functionality. Software licence valid for AWY and FSO application.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 230 / 296
42 SWP REG.9400AWY R.1.0 V1.0.0 SPECIFIC INFORMATION

This chapter gives operative information regarding the Software Package Version 1.0.0: requirements (PC and equipment Firmware), SW Package Identification, SW Package Components, ECT SW SubComponent, NE MIB Compatibility, new features, restrictions and known problems. For versions higher than V1.0.0 please refer to next chapters of this section. Please refer to para.E.2.5.2 on page 286 for the meaning of SWP Release, Version and Patch Level. N.B.
With reference to the Versions stated in this chapter, please read carefully the N.B. on page 274.
42.1 ECT requirements

For ECT installation it is necessary a PC with the requirements hereafter described: 1) HW Configuration 2) CPU: RAM: Hard Disk space: Display Resolution: CDROM Drive: Primary Interface: Optional Interface: Pentium III 850 MHz 256 Mbytes (512 Mbytes suggested for Windows XP) 4 Gbytes 1024x768 pixel 24X Serial Port RS232C 9.6 to 57.6 Kbits/sec. Ethernet Card 10/100 Mbits/sec.
Windows Versions Windows NT 4.0 SP3 till SP6 Windows 2000 till SP4 Windows XP till SP1
3)
Additional requirements N.B. Netscape Communicator or MS Internet Explorer 4.x or higher. Java 2 Run Time Environment versions from 1.3.106 to 1.4.104 Each specific Java version could require minimal Windows SP installation.
4)
Additional information On IDU PQ/ECRC controller it is requested a Raw Loader version V8.1.0 of May 22nd, 2003 or higher. Reference SNMPIM version: 2.14 (SGPA 3.2.4+).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 231 / 296
42.2 SWP version specific data

N.B.
42.2.1 SW Package Identification Identification SWP REG. 9400AWY R1.0 Version V1.0.0 Date April 19th, 2004
42.2.2 SW Package Components Name SWP REG. 9400AWY R1.0 SWCECT9400AWY_V10 SWCEC9400AWY_V10 SWCOCR9400AWY_V10 SWCOCF9400AWY_V10 SWCFD9400AWY_V10 Description SW Package for 2G Radio Regenerator Low Capacity PDH Equipments Equipment Craft Terminal SW Component Equipment Controller SW Component ODU Radio Controller SW Component ODU FSO Controller SW Component File Descriptor for SW Download Component Version V1.0.0 V1.0.0 V1.0.0 V1.4.4 V1.0.19 V1.0.0
42.2.3 ECT SW SubComponents Name JRE LLMAN CTK CTK SNMP AddOn CTK HOL AddOn JUSMSNMPCOMMON JUSMSNMPHELP CTK Q3 AddOn Version V1.4.104 V3.3.2 V3.0.2 P5 V3.0.3 P2 V1.0.0 P2 V1.0.0 V0.1.0 V3.0.3 P2 Description Java 2 Run Time Environment Lower Layers Manager Craft Terminal Base Platform Craft Terminal Base Platform SNMP AddOn (EMLIM) Craft Terminal Base Platform Help OnLine AddOn User Service Manager for SNMP MW NEs Help OnLine for SNMP MW NEs Craft Terminal Base Platform Q3 AddOn (EMLIM)
42.2.4 NE MIB Compatibility NE MIB it is not compatible with previous versions (this is the first version) and has to be manually configured.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 232 / 296
With reference to the Versions stated on this page, please read carefully the N.B. on page 274.
42.3 New features and modifications

Not Applicable for first release.
N.B.
Version 1.0.0 manages the Radio application only (1+0 configuration).
42.4 Restrictions and known problems

For a corrected operation, only on some PC with Windows 2000 or XP using serial connection, due to an unidentified problem to be solved by ECT Platform, it is necessary to start Low Layers Manager before to start ECT Platform (Alcatel 1320CT). Alarm Surveillance: the application closure is followed by a message error (with Windows NT only). No impact in the functionality. At first activation sometimes, after NES opening, the message ANTP: Unrecoverable error appears also with ANTP deactivasted (with Windows NT only). No impact in the functionality. SNMP Agent it is not able to correctly manage event reporting when IP addresses are different on NMS ports and Ethernet port.
42.5 New features and modifications of SWP versions higher than V.1.0.0
Please refer to next chapters of this section.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 233 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
234 / 296

This chapter gives operative information regarding the Software Package Version 1.0.1: requirements (PC and equipment Firmware), SW Package Identification, SW Package Components, ECT SW SubComponent, NE MIB Compatibility, new features, restrictions and known problems. For versions higher than V1.0.1 please refer to next chapters of this section. Please refer to para.E.2.5.2 on page 286 for the meaning of SWP Release, Version and Patch Level. N.B.
With reference to the Versions stated in this chapter, please read carefully the N.B. on page 274.

As for V.1.0.0 (see para.42.1 on page 231).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 235 / 296

N.B.
43.2.1 SW Package Identification Identification SWP REG. 9400AWY R1.0 Version V1.0.1 Date July 8th, 2004
43.2.2 SW Package Components Name SWP REG. 9400AWY R1.0 SWCECT9400AWY_V10 SWCEC9400AWY_V10 SWCOCR9400AWY_V10 SWCOCF9400AWY_V10 SWCFD9400AWY_V10 Description SW Package for 2G Radio Regenerator Low Capacity PDH Equipments Equipment Craft Terminal SW Component Equipment Controller SW Component ODU Radio Controller SW Component ODU FSO Controller SW Component File Descriptor for SW Download Component Version V1.0.1 V1.0.1 V1.0.4 V1.4.12 V1.1.0 V1.0.1
43.2.3 ECT SW SubComponents Name JRE LLMAN CTK CTK SNMP AddOn CTK HOL AddOn JUSMSNMPCOMMON JUSMSNMPHELP CTK Q3 AddOn Version V1.4.104 V3.3.2 V3.0.3 P4a V3.1.0 P1b V1.0.0 P2 V1.0.2 V0.1.1 V3.0.3 P2 Description Java 2 Run Time Environment Lower Layers Manager Craft Terminal Base Platform Craft Terminal Base Platform SNMP AddOn (EMLIM) Craft Terminal Base Platform Help OnLine AddOn User Service Manager for SNMP MW NEs Help OnLine for SNMP MW NEs Craft Terminal Base Platform Q3 AddOn (EMLIM)
43.2.4 NE MIB Compatibility

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NE MIB it is automatically converted from previous released versions 1.0.0.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 236 / 296

With respect to the previous SWP REG.9400AWY R.1.0 V1.0.0, the SWP REG.9400AWY R.1.0 V1.0.1 introduces the following features and modifications: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) l) Version 1.0.1 manages the Radio application (1+0 and 1+0 Exp/1+1 configurations) and the FSO application. Inserted new management for polarity configuration by CT on Summarizing alarms. It has been modified to onlyLocal the tipology of NearEnd Tributary E3/DS3 loopback. It has been extended the management of Service Kit Connected alarm for Pegaso ASIC alignment (1 bit of 1 register). Improved management of SoftReset associated to new version of Traminer CPLD. Improved management of Lac State in caso of NMS system already connected. It has been extended the loopback management to enable the functionality also to NMS system. Improved management of CardFail alarm to speedup HST switching. It has been extended the management of LossOfSignal alarm also in case of Auxiliary Interface configured as V11 Codirectional. Improved management of maintenance operations control. Improved management of alarms related to EPS TX switch position. Improved management of 1+1 configurations for both ETSI and FCC systems.
m ) Improved management of IDUODU connection in case of online modification of system capacity and/or modulation. n) o) p) q) r) s) Improved management of Protections control features. Improved management of Performance Monitoring features. Improved management of TMNRF pointToPoint in case of online modification of system capacity. It has been completed the correct management of HST switch in case of contemporary presence of the alarms (TX Fail and RUP). It has been resolved the problem on incorrect reporting of MAC Address value associated to LAN interface. It has been inserted a new version of OC Radio SW, aligned to the same version used on UXFLAT 1+0 configuration, with the following modifications: Tx Power filtered on Tx Power configuration changement Frequency plan V06 modified on local loop for the RX base band LO Frequency IDU detection at ODU startup improvement Inhibition of the reading ODU remote received power level interruption, for ATPC Correction of a bug in the temperature regulation for the overload attenuator Modification of DCA thresholds, for UxFlat Configuration saving on data changed only, for UxFlat New Perseo parameters to improve 16QAM/8E1, for UxFlat Use of MVT detection for all the rates in 4QAM, for UxFlat New Perseo parameters to improve 4QAM/8E1, for UxFlat 03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 237 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
43.4 Restrictions and known problems

For a corrected operation, only on some PC with Windows 2000 or XP using serial connection, due to an unidentified problem to be solved by ECT Platform, it is necessary to start Low Layers Manager before to start ECT Platform (Alcatel 1320CT). Alarm Surveillance: the application closure is followed by a message error (with Windows NT only). No impact in the functionality. At first activation sometimes, after NES opening, the message ANTP: Unrecoverable error appears also with ANTP deactivasted (with Windows NT only). No impact in the functionality.
43.5 Operative hints

a) Installation procedure It is the same of previous version 1.0.0 but it is necessary to select Forced option on CT screen for SW Download activation request. This warning has been introduced in relevant procedures: b) para.12.3 on page 60 chapter 13 on page 75
Configuration change from 1+0 extendable to 1+1 (9400AWY only) Some ways to proceed for this configuration change do not give good results. The suggested procedure has been introduced in para.23.1.3 on page 131.
43.6 New features and modifications of SWP versions higher than V.1.0.1
Please refer to next chapters of this section.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 238 / 296

PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
This chapter gives operative information regarding the Software Package Version 1.0.2: requirements (PC and equipment Firmware), SW Package Identification, SW Package Components, ECT SW SubComponent, NE MIB Compatibility, new features, restrictions and known problems. Please refer to para.E.2.5.2 on page 286 for the meaning of SWP Release, Version and Patch Level. N.B.
With reference to the Versions stated in this chapter, please read carefully the N.B. on page 274. In case you receive a SWP with version higher than that stated, please refer to the documentation accompanying the SWP delivery to get this information.

As for V.1.0.0 (see para.42.1 on page 231).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 239 / 296

N.B.
44.2.1 SW Package Identification Identification SWP REG. 9400AWY R1.0 Version V1.0.2c Date November 10th, 2004
44.2.2 SW Package Components Name SWP REG. 9400AWY R1.0 SWCECT9400AWY_V10 SWCEC9400AWY_V10 SWCOCR9400AWY_V10 SWCOCF9400AWY_V10 SWCFD9400AWY_V10 Description SW Package for 2G Radio Regenerator Low Capacity PDH Equipments Equipment Craft Terminal SW Component Equipment Controller SW Component ODU Radio Controller SW Component ODU FSO Controller SW Component File Descriptor for SW Download Component Version V1.0.2c V1.0.2 V1.0.8 V1.4.29 V1.1.0 V1.0.2
44.2.3 ECT SW SubComponents
Name JRE LLMAN CTK CTK SNMP AddOn CTK HOL AddOn JUSMSNMPCOMMON JUSMSNMPHELP CTK Q3 AddOn
Version V1.4.104 V3.3.2 V3.0.3 P4a V3.1.0 P1b V1.0.0 P2 V1.0.5 V1.0.1 V3.0.3 P2
Description Java 2 Run Time Environment Lower Layers Manager Craft Terminal Base Platform Craft Terminal Base Platform SNMP AddOn (EMLIM) Craft Terminal Base Platform Help OnLine AddOn User Service Manager for SNMP MW NEs Help OnLine for SNMP MW NEs Craft Terminal Base Platform Q3 AddOn (EMLIM)
44.2.4 NE MIB Compatibility NE MIB it is automatically converted from previous released version 1.0.0 and it is compatible with last released version 1.0.1 and previous prereleases 1.0.2x.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

t.b.d.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 240 / 296
SECTION 5: APPENDICES
SECTION CONTENT Appendix A Equipment description and components This Appendix sumsup the equipment functions and defines its components from the SW point of view. Appendix B SW allocation, Flash Card and equipment control This Appendix presents the software allocation in the various parts of the equipment, the types of Flash Card and its contents, and the general characteristics of the ECT and RECT. Appendix C General on SWP installation This Appendix introduces the basic information regarding the software installation. Appendix D ECTEquipment connection via public switched telephone network This Appendix explains the operations necessary to allow the remote connection to the FInterface, from a local PC configurated as ECT, through a switched telephone line of the standard Public Telephone Network. Appendix E Documentation Guide This Appendix contains all information regarding this handbook (purpose, applicability, history) and the Customer Documentation set it belongs to, in particular the list of the handbooks the Operators should have in order to carry out the required operations. Appendix F Acronyms and abbreviations Appendix G Glossary of terms
PAGE 243
251
259
263
273
289 293
The symbol
Referenced handbook P/Ns are given in para.E.2 on page 279.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 241 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
242 / 296
APPENDIX A : EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND COMPONENTS

This appendix sumsup the equipment functions and defines its components from the SW point of view: Functions and configurations IDU and ODU Components IDU ODU Allowed Equipment Types Remote Inventory Management on page 244 on page 245: on page 245 on page 246 on page 247 on page 249
For more detailed in formation from the hardware point of view, please refer to: 9400 AWY Technical Handbook or: 9400 FSO Technical Handbook From the software point of view, the equipment management is carried out as explained in Section 2 AWY/FSO NE MANAGEMENT on page 77, in chapters relevant to the EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT . The equipment type HSW indicated in Tab. 21. on page 248 is not managed in current SWP version.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 243 / 296
A.1 : Functions and configurations

ULS NE (9400AWY and 9400FSO) has the aim to multiplexer/demultiplexer the main tributaries (up to 16 E1/16 DS1 or 1 E3/1 DS3) with different modulation formats. The following Tab. 18. summarizes the relation among market, product type tributaries and modulation. Tab. 18. Markets, product type, tributaries and modulations forecasted Market Product Type Tributary 2xE1 4xE1 AWY ETSI 8xE1 16xE1 1xE3 FSO 16xE1 1xE3 4xDS1 ANSI AWY 8xDS1 16xDS1 1xDS3 Modulation 4QAM 4QAM / 16QAM 4QAM /16QAM 4QAM / 16QAM 4QAM / 16QAM 4PSK 4PSK 4QAM 4QAM / 16QAM 4QAM / 16QAM 4QAM / 16QAM
The main functions performed by IDU and ODU of ULS equipment are the following: Multiplexer/Demultiplexer The multiplexer function receives main tributaries (see Tab. 18. ) and generates a PDH frame. The demultiplexer function receives a PDH frame and generates main tributaries. Signal Protection switch (if any) The function provides one protection channel for the main signal against channelassociated failures for both hardware failures and temporary signals degradation or losses due to propagation effects (e.g. rain) according to equipment configuration. Radio Physical Interface (AWY) The function converts a radio frequency signal into an internal logic level signal, and vice versa (RPPI). Specifically, the following functions are performed: Modulation and Tx functions in the transmit side Demodulation and Rx functions in the receive side Free Space Optics (FSO) The function converts an optical signal into an internal logic level signal, and vice versa. Specifically, the following functions are performed: Modulation and Tx functions in the transmit side Demodulation and Rx functions in the receive side
ULS NE can be composed by: one channel (1+0 configurations and 1+0 extendible configurations); two channels (1+1 configurations).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The FSO is supported only in 1+0 configuration. The 2+0 and N+1 configurations are not supported.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 244 / 296
A.2 : IDU and ODU Components

The ULS NE is composed by two different parts: the indoor and the outdoor part. In the following they are described from physical and management point of view. A.2.1 : IDU The indoor part is composed by one shelf (see Fig. 153. and Fig. 154. ). It contains the following units: (1+0) IDU slot 1: slot 2: ACCESS Unit Main Unit slot 1: ACCESS Unit slot 2: MAIN Unit Fig. 153. (1+0) IDU (1+1) and (1+0 expandable) IDU slot 1: ACCESS Unit slot 2: Extension Unit slot 3: Main Unit slot 4: FAN unit slot 1: ACCESS Unit slot 2: EXTENSION Unit (N.B.) slot 3: MAIN Unit Fig. 154. (1+1) and (1+0 expandable) IDU N.B. In the 1+1 subequipped configurations (1+0 EXPANDABLE), slot 2 is not used. slot 4: FAN Unit
The ACCESS unit accommodates the connectors referred to E1/E3/DS1/DS3 tributaries, user service channel, housekeeping and summarizing, NMS V11 and G703 interfaces, and a telephone jack. The Main Unit contains the MULDEM, the PQECRC and the Power Supply units. The MULDEM unit manages the ETSI 1xE3/16xE1 and ANSI 1xDS3/16xDS1 tributaries, the Mux/Demux and the cable interface functions. The PQECRC unit implements the Equipment and IDU Controller functions. The Data unit implementing Ethernet functions can be plugged onto the Main unit. It is not supported in the current release. The Main unit is used both in 1+0 and 1+1 configurations. The Extension Unit contains the MULDEM and the Power Supply units. The Hitless unit and the Data unit implementing Ethernet functions can be plugged onto the Extension unit. Data unit is not supported in the current release. The Extension unit is used only in 1+1 configurations.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The FAN unit contains fans in order to provide the necessary ventilation to the IDU shelf (t is supported only in 1+0 expandable and 1+1 configurations). Only the FAN unit is shown at SNMP interface, independently from the number of fans composing it.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 245 / 296
A.2.2 : ODU According to the configuration type, two ODU types are managed in the Outdoor part. They can be: ODU (electrical ODU) ODUFSO (optical ODU) The ODU type is implicitly defined by the NE configuration. Each ODU contains a PQECRC unit which implements the ODU Controller functions.
ODU / ODUFSO
Fig. 155. (1+0) ODU (electrical or optical)
ODU Ch#1
ODU Ch#2
Fig. 156. (1+1) ODU (only electrical)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 246 / 296
A.2.3 : Allowed Equipment Types This paragraph provides information on the allowed equipment types for all the configurations supported by ULS NE. [1] Shelves Equipment Types The following Tab. 19. provides the shelves equipment types allowed for each supported NE configuration and market type: Tab. 19. Shelves Equipment Types NE
Configuration
Market Type (note 1)
Shelf position 1 2
Allowed Equipment Type Description IDU 1+0 Shelf ODU 1+0 4/16 QAM ETSI ODU 1+0 4/16 QAM ANSI IDU 1+0 Shelf ODU 1+0 FSO ETSI IDU 1+1 Shelf ODU 1+0 4/16 QAM ETSI ODU 1+0 4/16 QAM ANSI ODU 1+0 4/16 QAM ETSI ODU 1+0 4/16 QAM ANSI
Allowed Equipment Type IDU10 ODUE ODUA IDU10 ODUFSOE IDU11 ODUE ODUA ODUE ODUA
Equipment Label IDU ODU Ch#1
1+0
ETSI ANSI (note 1) ETSI (note 1) ETSI
1+0 FSO
1 2 1 2 3
IDU ODUFSO IDU ODU Ch#1 ODU Ch#0
1+1 1 1 (note 2)
ANSI ETSI ANSI
(note 1) The equipment types allowed for IDU shelf are market type independent. (note 2) All the 1+1 configurations. In case of 1+0 extendible configurations shelf position 3 is not supported.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 247 / 296
[2]
: Slots and Subslots Equipment Types The following tables indicate the allowed equipment types for each slot inside each shelf type and if the equipment expected value is settable by the operator. IDU
Tab. 20. IDU allowed board/plugin types in (1+0) configurations IDU10 Position 1.1 1.2 N.B. Allowed Equipment Type Description Access Unit Main Unit 24V Range Supply Main Unit 48/60 V Range Supply Main Unit 48/60 V Range High Power Supply (N.B.) Allowed Equipment Type ACCESS M24 M4860 M4860H Equipment Label IDU/ACCESS IDU/MAIN Ch#1
This power supply (high power version) is allowed only in case of 1+0 FSO configuration.
Tab. 21. IDU allowed board/plugin types in (1+1) and (1+0 expandable) configurations IDU11 Position 1.1 1.2 (note 1) 1.2.1 (note 2) 1.3 1.4 Allowed Equipment Type Description Access Unit Not provisioned Extension Unit 24V Range Supply Extension Unit 48/60 V Range Supply Hitless Switch unit (not managed in current SWP version) Main Unit 24V Range Supply Main Unit 48/60 V Range Supply FAN unit Allowed Equipment Type ACCESS EMPTY E24 E4860 HSW M24 M4860 FAN Equipment Label IDU/ACCESS IDU/EXT Ch#0 IDU/EXT/HSW Ch#0 IDU/MAIN Ch#1 IDU/FAN
(note 1) In the 1+1 subequipped configurations this slot is empty. (note 2) Position 1.2.1 is created only in the 1+1 Hitless configurations (HST and FD).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 248 / 296
Electrical ODU No slot can be defined inside the Electrical ODU. Optical ODU
Tab. 22. Allowed board types in optical ODU ETSI ODUFSOE Position 2.1 2.2 Allowed Equipment Type Description Optical Interface ETSI board Optical Transceiver board Allowed Equipment Type OPINTE OPTR Equipment Label ODUFSO/OPINT ODUFSO/OPTR
A.2.4 : Remote Inventory Management The Remote Inventory feature allows to store the information useful to identify the components of the product. From management point of view the Remote Inventory data will be provided by the following equipment types: Main Unit (M24, M4860, M4860H) Extension Unit (E24, E4860) Hitless Switch Unit (HSW) (not managed in current SWP version) Access Unit (ACCESS) FAN unit (FAN) ODU unit (ODUE, ODUA ) ODU FSO unit (ODUFSOE) For all the other equipment types the remoteInventoryStatus columnar object assumes the value unavailable. The RI data of each subcomponents unit (i.e. MULDEM in the IDU, MILOU in the ODU, OPTR in the ODUFSO) wont be seen at SNMP management interface but only by means of factory tools. Also the information about the equipment type can be read from the remote inventory data (Unit mnemonic field). All the units are provided in its own remote inventory data this type of information. It is used to identify the actual equipment type and then, eventually, to provide an equipment mismatch alarm, if the equipment type read from remote inventory data is different from the equipment expected provided by the managers. If it isnt possible to read the Remote Inventory information, a Card Fail alarm is declared.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 249 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
250 / 296
APPENDIX B : SW ALLOCATION, FLASH CARD AND EQUIPMENT CONTROL

This Appendix presents: the software allocation in the various parts of the equipment, herebelow the types of Flash Card and its contents, on page 254 the general characteristics of the ECT and RECT, on page 256. Fig. 157. herebelow shows the Interfaces for equipment control Fig. 158. herebelow shows the MAIN UNIT + FLASH CARD unit assembly view Fig. 159. herebelow shows the FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction
Ethernet Interface for OS connection
F Interface for ECT connection
Flash card label
Fig. 157. Interfaces for equipment control and Flash card label on MAIN Unit
FRONT PLATE
EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER BABY BOARD (PQ/ECRC) MAIN BOARD
FLASH CARD
Fig. 158. MAIN unit + FLASH CARD
TOP SIDE
INSERTION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 159. FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 251 / 296
B.1 : Allocation of equipment and craft terminal software

Fig. 160. herebelow roughly depicts the NE main parts containing the local SW and the interfaces with the Operator (Extension Unit and RT0 are present in 1+1 configuration and are not equipped in 1+0 compact/expandable configurations).
MAIN UNIT PQ/ECRC SUBUNIT FLASH CARD EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER RAM
F Ethernet
MULDEM SUBUNIT
EXTENSION UNIT MULDEM SUBUNIT RT0 FLASH EPROM ODU CONTROLLER RAM RT1 FLASH EPROM ODU CONTROLLER RAM
Fig. 160. Equipment main parts containing local SW
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 252 / 296
c)
Local software allocation Once the system has been configured and activated (as explained in Section 1 Installation), Equipment and Craft Terminal must not necessarily be left connected, because equipment contains all the software necessary for its working. This equipment local software comprises programs and configuration data. Programs and data are managed differently from each other: 1) Equipment Controller Whole Equipment SW (programs and configuration data) is contained in the Flash Card housed in MAIN units PQ/ECRC subunit (the Flash Card contains also the software (programs and configuration data) relevant to the peripheral units, i.e., in the figure RTs). See Fig. 158. and Fig. 159. on page 251. This flash card is removable (i.e. replaceable), and the programs can be overwritten by a SW download from CT (through F interface) or Network Management Operation System (through Ethernet interface) to the MAIN unit. More precisely, the Flash Card contains two independent instances of the Equipment SW programs (one active, the other standby), so that the above cited SW download is actually done toward the standby instance, while equipment goes on working with the SW programs of the active instance. Swapping between the two instances is done only under Operators request. Peripheral Units The Peripheral units (RTs) contain their own local SW (programs and configuration data), housed in a local Flash Eprom (physically not removable). The programs in this local Flash Eprom can be overwritten by means of a SW download from the Equipment Controller with the same activestandby duplication described before for the Equipment Controller. Equipment Configuration Data (MIB) The whole equipment configuration data (together with programs) are stored in the MAIN unit PQ/ECRC subunit Flash Card. Refer to point B.2.3 on page 255 for details.
2)
3)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 253 / 296
B.2 : Flash Card

B.2.1 : Flash Card types A FLASH CARD is plugged into the Main board (see Fig. 158. on page 251) giving the maximum capacity for the tributaries and the modulation type as reported in the following Tab. 23. (5 possible types of Flash card). Tab. 23. Available Flash cards Flash Card Name Full Flexible Flash Card 16xE1/DS1 16 QAM Flash Card 4xE1/DS1 16 QAM Flash Card 16xE1/DS1 4 QAM Flash Card 4xE1/DS1 4 QAM Flash Card Notes: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) A 16 QAM Flash card does not allow the transmission of a 4 QAM signal. A 4xE1/DS1 Flash Card does not allow the transmission of a capacity greater than 4xE1/DS1. As far as E3/DS3 tributary rate is concerned, only the Full Flexible Flash card can be selected. The Full Flexible Flash Card allows the transmission of whatever capacity and modulation. In 9400FSO equipment, only the Full Flexible Flash Card can be used. For the P/Ns of the Flash Card types please refer to the: 9400 AWY/FSO Technical Handbook, section System composition and configurations chapter IDU part list B.2.2 : Flash Card identification a) b) the Flash Card P/N is reported on the label affixed on it; moreover, the Flash Card Name is affixed on the label present on the front panel of the Main Unit (see Fig. 157. on page 251). Capacity Full flexible Full flexible Up to 4xE1/DS1 Full flexible Up to 4xE1/DS1 Modulation Full flexible 16 QAM 16 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 254 / 296
B.2.3 : Flash Card contents The following table indicates the FLASH CARD contents in the various phases of SW management:
NE DATA PHASE BASE CONFIGURATION SW PROGRAMS ROUTING CONFIGURATION MIB
n.b.2 1) 2) 3) As supplied by Factory Defined by Flash y Card P/N. After SWP Not changeable, download but with Flash After NE data Card upgrade definition (see para B.2.4 herebelow) NO Not present Not present To be defined by C.T. Present By a new SWP download n.b.4 Unmeaningful C.T. = Craft Terminal Yes, by C.T. NO
n.b.1 Not present To be defined by C.T. Present Yes, by C.T. NO n.b.3
Present
MODIFICABILITY
SAVE/RESTORE
NE= Network Element n.b.1
SWP= Software Package
MIB The system configuration data set is named MIB. Such data are defined by Craft Terminal after the SWP download. They can be changed only within the limits implicitly defined by the employed Flash Card type. For its save/restore refer to n.b.3 herebelow. ROUTING CONFIGURATION DATA They are: 1. 2. 3. 4. Local configuration Systems local address NTP server configuration Interface configuration NMS configuration Ethernet configuration IP configuration IP Static Routing configuration OSPF AREA configuration
n.b.2
All those listed parameter are NOT stored into the MIB file because considered unique to a particular system in a network and are NOT meant to be reproduced on other systems in the same network because will cause conflicts in the supervision network centre. n.b.3 n.b.4 The MIB file save/restore to/from a file in the Craft Terminal (or OS) environment is not possible in SWP first version(s). It should be possible in future versions(s). A new SWP download is envisaged whenever a new SWP package version or release (new with respect to that presently loaded in the system) is supplied to Customer (*). (*) for the meaning of SWP package version and release refer to para.E.2.5.2 on page 286. B.2.4 : Flash Card upgrade (for 9400AWY only) Refer to the instructions given in the: 9400AWY Technical Handbook, section System composition and configurations chapter IDU operative information, para.Flash Card
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 255 / 296
B.3 : Equipment control

B.3.1 : Interfaces (see Fig. 157. on page 251): The NE can be controlled by the OS (e.g. Alcatel 1353SH) through the Ethernet interface. ECT (Equipment Craft Terminal, briefly Craft Terminal) can be connected to the MAIN unit through a RS232 interface (F interface). This connection can be: local (ECT) through a suitable cable supplied with the equipment, or remote (RECT) as explained in para.B.3 on page 256 remote through a ECTequipment connection via public switched telephone network, as explained in Appendix D on page 263.
B.3.2 : OperatorEquipment Interaction 1) The Local Operator can manage the Equipment software programs and most configuration data through the Equipment Craft Terminal 1320CT connected to the F interface (see Fig. 160. on page 252 and Fig. 157. on page 251). The Craft Terminal characteristics (computer configuration) are listed in chapter 42 on page 231. The Craft Terminal is a project in charge of the local management of single network elements, providing ITU compliant Information Model Interface to the Network Element. Multiple NE management up to 128 Network elements is possible obtaining a remote Craft Terminal application. The general information on the Craft Terminal is presented in the: 1320CT Basic Craft Terminal Operators Handbook that the operator has to read before this Handbook. In this Handbook is given the general description regarding use, navigation, rules, etc., common to all the NE using the same Craft Terminal. Furthermore, the same handbook contains the detailed description of common operations as Installation and common screens as Network Element Synthesis view. The Network Element Synthesis view is the first view presented to the operator entering the application. Starting from this view it is possible to login to the NE and then to enter the EMLULS views. This Operators Handbook deals with the EMLULS views of the Craft Terminal, which directly allows to manage the Network Element. A detailed description of the AWY/FSOs EMLULS screens is given in the dedicated Sections 2AWY/FSO NE MANAGEMENT and 3AWY/FSO MAINTENANCE of this handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 256 / 296
2)
A further SW application, also available in the PC and OS environment and named SIBDL (Standard Image Binary Download), deals with the SW download in special cases, which are detailed in the following. The physical interface for running this application from Craft Terminal is F interface. The installation and use of SIBDL is detailed in the dedicated Section of the: 9400AWY Line Up Guide or 9400FSO Line Up Guide
B.3.3 : ECT ALCATEL TMN management products 1320 CT called Craft Terminals (CT) consists of a compatible personal computer and application software specially developed for monitoring transmission equipment. The CT designed to monitor a single transmission equipment is called Equipment Craft Terminal (ECT) or 1320CT. For each 9600USY&MDR9000s station an ALCATEL proprietary SWP (SoftWare Package) is employed, which depends on the productrelease and the NE (Network Element) associated to the specific configuration. B.3.4 : RECT The Remote Equipment Craft Terminal is a feature only present in the Single NE Link architecture which allows the local operator, using an ECT connected to the F interface of the NE, to zoom and perform a complete set of management operations on all the reachable NEs in the network. The Remote NE can be physically reached through the NMS channels or Ethernet LAN. RECT can be connected to any NE pertaining to the same area of the local NE and to any NE pertaining to different areas (assuming that the DCN network has been correctly designed and hence interarea communication is possible from networking viewpoint). Of course, due to the limitation of the physical resources in the Equipment Controller of the NE, some network design constraints must be taken into account as the total number of managed NEs (128). The RECT features and limitations are briefly the following: 1) 2) The RECT function provides a remote login facility similar to those offered by an OS to manage several configured NEs, included the local one. The contemporaneous presence of the RECT function and an OS is possible. The access disable flag avoids access conflict between the OS and both RECT and ECT on some operations as configuration modification and remote control with access filtering. The NE which may be remotely controlled by a RECT must be configured and must be loaded with the same SW version supporting the RECT function. A NE not supporting RECT function shall refuse the incoming association issued by a RECT and the ECT displays only local information. Only three RECTs shall be active at a time over one NE. The coexistence of ECTs and RECTs in the whole network is guaranteed since the conflict in configuring the NEs is solved locally by the NE itself. The operator, through the RECT function, is able to see the alarm synthesis of the whole network . In a network the maximum number of NEs equipped with the RECT function are 128. This value identifies what it is understood as small network for which the RECT function may replace the Element Manager.
3)
4)
5)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
6)
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 257 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
258 / 296
APPENDIX C : GENERAL ON SWP INSTALLATION

This Appendix introduces the basic information regarding the software installation. N.B. Before reading this paragraph, it is suggested to read (if not yet done) previous para.B.1 on page 252.
Fig. 161. depicts the main phases for SW management. SWP CDROM
1) SWP LOADING IN PC
MSNT ENVIRONMENT
CRAFT TERMINAL
2)
NEW SWP INSTALLATION
3)
NE SWP LOADING INTO EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER (if necessary) DURATION: 1/2 hour with interface F some minutes with Ethernet interface
5) NE CONFIG.
DATA MNGT
4)
AUTOMATIC SW DOWNLOAD TO SUPERVISOR UNITS (if necessary) DURATION: some minutes
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 161. Software management main phases
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 259 / 296
The SW management can be distinguished into: program management, i.e.: (1) and (2) : SWP loading from CDROM to the Personal Computer, after which the PC becomes and can be used as the Equipment Craft Terminal (3) NE SWP downloading from ECT toward the NetworkElements Equipment Controller (EC) (4) SW downloading from EC toward the Peripheral Units.
NE configuration data management: (5) NE configuration data definition.
The installation can be distinguished in two main procedures: SWP installation in PC environment that includes tasks (1) and (2) mentioned above. The relevant operating instructions are given in chapter 11 on page 23 SWP download toward NE that includes tasks (3) to (5) mentioned above. The relevant operating instructions are given in chapter 12 on page 59
These main procedures are usually carried out sequentially; some different situations are described in para.C.2 on page 261. Furthermore, additional procedures are envisaged to be used in special situations, as described in para.C.1 herebelow.
C.1 : Troubleshooting situations

In the following situations: 1) Flash Card to be replaced or: 2) NE not infactory configured
use the SW download through SIBDL program; refer to the dedicated section of the: 9400AWY Line Up Guide or 9400FSO Line Up Guide
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 260 / 296
C.2 : Common situations

1)
Network Element already configured with the more recent SWP version and Craft Terminal already available. NE ECT ECT release = NE release A.B.c A.B.c ECT version = NE version This is the typical situation of new installations: the Network Element SW configuration matches the available Craft Terminal SWP version, so that the NE can be loggedin and the Operator can carry out the required operations, without any preliminary actions.
2)
Network Element already configured with the more recent SWP version, but the Craft Terminal is not available or has a version older with respect to that of the Network Element(s). NE ECT ECT release = NE release A.B.d A.B.c ECT version < NE version In this case, carry out SWP installation in Craft Terminal environment as explained in Chapter 11 on page 23. After that, the situation is equal to that of point 1 ) above.
3)
Both Network Element and Craft Terminal already configured with a SWP version older than that made available by the a new SWP version (SAME RELEASE) ECT A.B.c NE running release = SWP release running version < SWP version SWP CDROM A.B.d
A.B.c
This could be the typical situation of installations already running with A.B SWP package (e.g.1.0.0), in the case a newer version of the same A.B SWP package has to be installed (e.g.1.0.1). Refer to Chapter 13 on page 75. After that, the situation is equal to that of point 1 ) above. N.B. Please refer to para.E.2.5.2 on page 286 for the meaning of SWP Release, Version and Patch Level.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 261 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
262 / 296
APPENDIX D : ECTEQUIPMENT CONNECTION VIA PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK

D.1 : Introduction
This chapter explains the operations necessary to allow the remote connection to the FInterface, from a local PC (with external or internal modem) configured as ECT, through a switched telephone line of the standard Public Telephone Network, as shown in Fig. 162. here below. This kind of remote control is possible for a single equipment as well as for a whole subnetwork.
local side (ECT side)
remote side (equipment side)
F Interface
Port COM
Telephone network PC/ECT

Local Modem Remote Modem
PC-LAPTOP/ECT
with internal modem
Fig. 162. ECTEquipment connection via Public Switched Telephone Network
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 263 / 296
D.2 : Certified equipment

The connection has been successfully tested: a) with the following types of modems: 1) 2) 3) b) Modem Sportster Flash (US Robotics) Modem TD32 AC (Westermo Teleindustri AB) 3Com 56K Faxmodem
with the following types of PC: 1) 2) with external modem: characteristics as in para.42.1 on page 231 with internal modem: PC laptop Dell Latitude: Processor equipped: Operating system: RAM equipped: Hard disk equipped: Internal Modem:
PENTIUM III Microsoft Windows 2000 v. 5.00.2195 service pack 2 128 Mbytes 10 Gbytes 3COM 56K v.90 Mini PCI MODEM
c)
and with the following local/remote combinations: Local Modem Remote Modem Sportster Flash Sportster Flash TD 32 AC 3Com 56K Faxmodem TD 32 AC TD 32 AC Sportster Flash 3Com 56K Faxmodem TD 32 AC PC laptop Dell Latitude as in Sportster Flash point b ) 2 ) above 3Com 56K Faxmodem
Testing the connection with different types of modems is fully on Customers charge.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 264 / 296
D.3 : Connection cables

In the following figures, the cables for the connections are described:
PC/ECT (DTE)
Cannon 9 pins female
Local Modem (DCE)

Cannon 25 pins male
DCD TD RD DTR DSR RTS CTS GND
1 2 3 4 6 7 8 5
DCD TD RD 4 RTS 5 CTS 6 DSR 20 DTR 7 GND
8 3 2
Fig. 163. ECTLocal external Modem cable
Remote Modem (DCE)

Cannon 25 pins male
F Interface (DCE)
Cannon 9 pins male
TD RD RTS CTS DSR CTS GND
2 3 4 5 6 20 7
3 2 7 8 6 4 5
TD RD RTS CTS DSR DTR GND
Fig. 164. F InterfaceRemote Modem cable
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 265 / 296
D.4 : Modem setting

D.4.1 : Setting of Sportster Flash Modem & 3Com 56K Faxmodem This modem requires only a SW setting via serial port. There is a little difference between local and remote modems setting (refer to Fig. 162. on page 263 for the distinction between local and remote), relevant to the autoanswer option that must be set in the remote modem and not set in the local modem. LOCAL MODEM SETTING To set the local modem, proceed as follows: 1) 2) 3) Only for external modem: connect the local modem to the PC/ECT with the cable of Fig. 163. on page 265. Only for external modem: Power and switch on the local modem. On the PC, activate program HyperTerminal and configure the PCModem serial line with the following parameters: * Bits per second: 38400 * Data Bits: 8 * Parity: None * Stop Bit: 1 * Flow control: None 4) Execute and store the modem setup, writing the following commands in the HyperTerminal program window: AT&F1<Return> ATT<Return> ATX3<Return> AT&W0<Return> 5) (Best PC default configuration recall) (Tone Dialling instead than Pulse Dialling) (Second Signal disabling, avoids problems with PABX) (Configuration store in NVRAM 0)
Now, setting has been completed. External Modem can be switched off and disconnected, if necessary.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 266 / 296
N.B.
For confirmation, the modem configuration can be checked writing the command ATI4<Return> in the HyperTerminal program window. Information displayed should be as follows:
ATI4 U.S. Robotics Sportster Flash 56000 Settings... B0 E1 F1 L2 M1 Q0 V1 X3 Y0 BAUD=38400 PARITY=N WORDLEN=8 DIAL=TONE OFF LINE CID=0 &A3 &M4 &B1 &N0 &C1 &P0 &D2 &R2 &H1 &S0 S02=043 S09=006 S18=000 S28=008 S35=000 &I0 &T5 &K1 &U0
&Y1 S04=010 S11=072 S21=010 S30=000 S38=000 S05=008 S12=050 S22=017 S31=128 S39=012 S06=004 S13=000 S23=019 S32=002 S40=000
S00=000 S07=060 S15=000 S25=005 S33=000 S41=004
S01=000 S08=002 S16=000 S27=001 S34=000 S42=000
S03=013 S10=014 S19=000 S29=020 S36=014
LAST DIALED #: REMOTE MODEM SETTING To set the remote modem, proceed as follows: a) b) carry out same steps 1 ) , 2 ) , 3 ) as for local modem setting execute and store the modem setup, writing in the HyperTerminal program window the same commands described in step 4 ) for the local modem setting, and adding the following command: ATS=1<Return> c) N.B. (Autoanswering setting)
now, setting has been completed. Modem can be switched off and disconnected, if necessary. For confirmation, the modem configuration can be checked writing the command ATI4<Return> in the HyperTerminal program window. Information displayed should be equal to that displayed for the local modem, with only the difference for field S00: S01=000 S02=043 S03=013 S04=010 S05=008 S06=004
S00=001
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 267 / 296
D.4.2 : TD32 AC Modem setting This modem requires an initial HW setup via dipswitches and a SW setting via serial port.
To set the modem, both local and remote, proceed as follows: 1) The initial HW setup via dipswitches is indicated in Fig. 165. herebelow:
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4
SW3
SW2
SW1
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW5
SW4
Fig. 165. TD32 AC modem dipswitch setting 2) 3) 4) Connect the local modem to the PC/ECT with the cable of Fig. 163. on page 265. Power on the local modem (there is no an ON/OFF switch). On the PC, activate program HyperTerminal and configure the PCModem serial line with the following parameters: * Bits per second: 38400 * Data Bits: 8 * Parity: None * Stop Bit: 1 * Flow control: None 5) Execute and store the modem setup, writing the following commands in the HyperTerminal program window: AT&F1<Return> AT&K0<Return> ATA<Return> AT&W0<Return> AT&Y0<Return>
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(Best PC default configuration recall) (DTE/DCE flow control disabling) (Automatic Answer enabling > Only on Remote modem and wait the message NO CARRIER) (Configuration store in NVRAM 0) (Configuration Set to load at switchon: NVRAM 0)
6)
Now, setting has been completed. Modem can be switched off and disconnected, if necessary.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 268 / 296
N.B.
For confirmation, the modem configuration can be checked writing the command AT\S<Return> in the HyperTerminal program window. Information displayed should be as follows:
AT\S CMD DESCRIPTION / OPTION COUNTRY...........IT DTE BPS........38400 DTE PARITY.....8NONE LINE SPEED......NONE B BELL MODE........OFF E CMD ECHO..........ON F LINE MODE.......AUTO L SPKR VOLUME......LOW M SPKR CONTROL....CALL N AUTO MODE.........ON Q QUIET............OFF V RESULT FORM.....LONG W EC MSG.............0 X EXT RESULTS........4 Y LONG SPACE DISC...NO %C COMPRESSION.....BOTH K EXT. SERVICES......0 CMD &A &B &C &D &G &K &L &Q &R &S &T &X &Y \A \G \K \N DESCRIPTION / OPTION CHR ABORT OPT.....NO DTR DIAL OPTION...NO DCD OPTION........ON DTR OPTION.........0 GUARD TONE......NONE FLOW CONTROL....NONE NETWORK.........PSTN ASYNC/SYNC.........5 RTS/CTS.........AUTO DSR OPT............0 ENABLE RDL........NO SYNC CLOCK.......INT PROFILE........NVM.0 MAX BLK SIZE.....192 REMOTE FLOW......OFF BRK OPT............5 ECL MODE........AUTO CMD DESCRIPTION / OPTION *H NEG. SPEED......HIGH S0 RINGS TO ANS.....002 S1 RING COUNT.......000 S2 <ESC> CHAR.......043 S3 <CR> CHAR........013 S4 <LF> CHAR........010 S5 <BS> CHAR........008 S7 CONNECT TIME.....060 S8 PAUSE TIME.......002 S12 ESC GUARD TIME...050 S30 CONNECT INACT....000 S32 XON CHAR.........017 S33 XOFF CHAR........019 S36 FALLBACK ACTION..007 S37 MODE SELECT......000 S48 V42 NEG CTRL.....007 S95 RES. CODE........000
D.5 : PC laptop Dell Latitude setting

The following setting must be done: Control Panel > Alcatel Lower Layer > Serial port > COM3 and Serial port selected
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 269 / 296
D.6 : Setting up the connection

In order to activate the connection and operate the ECT in remote way, proceed as specified herebelow. Refer to Fig. 162. on page 263 for the distinction between local and remote modems. N.B. Leaving the remote modem permanently switched on and permanently connected to Finterface and telephone line, operations set up by steps 1 ) thru 4 ) , it is possible to access the equipment in any moment. In order to access the equipment by local ECT, proceed as specified in steps 5 ) thru 14 ) . 1) 2) Connect the remote modem to equipments F interface with the cable of Fig. 164. on page 265. Connect the remote modem to the telephone line (as far as Sportster Flash model is concerned, the connector to be used is the nearest to that used for the connection with equipments F interface and signed with the wall symbol). Power and switch on the remote modem. Be sure remote equipment is switched on and correctly working. Connect the local modem to the PC/ECT (with the cable of Fig. 163. on page 265.) on the serial port assigned for the connection with F interface (usually COM1). Connect the local modem to the telephone line (as far as Sportster Flash model is concerned, the connector to be used is the nearest to that used for the connection with equipments F interface). Power and switch on the local modem. On the PC, activate program HyperTerminal and configure the PCLocal Modem serial line with the following parameters: * Bits per second: 38400 * Data Bits: 8 * Parity: None * Stop Bit: 1 * Flow control: None 9) For PC laptop Dell Latitude only, type the following command inside HyperTerminal program: AT&C0&D0&R1 N.B. this command must be typed every time the Hyper terminal session is opened (this command is not stored in the modem NV RAM).
3) 4) 5) 6)
7) 8)
10 ) Execute the telephone call from the PC writing the following command in the HyperTerminal program window: ATDnnn<Return> where nnn is the telephone network number associated to the remote telephone line (that which the remote modem is connected to). 11 ) Wait the message indicating the successful connection between local and remote modems. N.B. The message text depends on the modem type, as follows: CONNECT 14400/ARQ/V32/LAPM/V42BIS CONNECT 38400 12 ) Close HyperTerminal program. 13 ) Activate the ECT applicative SW as usual.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(Sportster Flash) (TD 32 AC)
14 ) At the end of the job, after having logged out from the ECT applicative SW, close the connection between local and remote modems, switching off the local modem or physically disconnecting the cable connecting it to the PC.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 270 / 296
D.7 : Changing the ECTequipment connection speed

D.7.1 : Introduction This feature is meant to use modems with speed different from that documented in previous paragraphs, giving the possibility to configure the ECT connection through modem (speed values: 9600, 19200, 38400, 56000) with automatic management of modem setup and phone call at ECT startup. As a matter of fact, this feature is not enough to set up the desired configuration. To make change operative, the following operations should be necessary: at equipment side, special pshell text commands must be forwarded through a special cable to be plugged inside the equipment at PC side, the configuration must be setup as explained in the following para.D.7.2 on page 272.
The default speed is 38400 and must not be changed by Customer ! Customers who need the change of modem speed must require the operation to be performed by the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) of relevant Alcatel Selling or Supporting Unit.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO USE THIS FEATURE WITHOUT TAC ASSISTANCE. YOU COULD CAUSE UNRECOVERABLE ECT UNACCESSIBILITY.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 271 / 296
D.7.2 : Configuration at PC side N.B. Please read carefully paragraph Introduction on page 271.
To configure the modem with the relevant speed, enter the menu Settings > Control Panel of the Operating System and open the Alcatel Lower Layers utility. The menu of Fig. 166. opens.
Fig. 166. Alcatel Lower Layers utility In the Subnetwork Type field select Modem. In the Modem field select the suitable Modem type. In the Modem speed field select the suitable speed (9600, 19200 or 38400) and click on OK. In the Phone Number field enter the phone number, which will be automatically called at the ECT startup.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 272 / 296
APPENDIX E : DOCUMENTATION GUIDE

This appendix contains all information regarding: this handbook, herebelow the Customer Documentation set this handbook belongs to, on page 279
E.1 : Handbook guide

This paragraph contains all information regarding this handbook: Handbook applicability Purpose of the handbook Handbook history on page 274 on page 275 on page 276
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 273 / 296
E.1.1 : Handbook applicability a) Product-release applicability This handbook applies to the following product-releases: 1+0 or 1+1 for Radio application PRODUCT 9411AWY 9413AWY 9415AWY 9418AWY 9423AWY 9425AWY 9428AWY 9432AWY 9438AWY RELEASE 1.00.00 1.00.00 1.00.00 1.00.00 1.00.00 1.00.00 1.00.00 1.00.00 1.00.00 9400AWY ANV P/N 3DB 05476 AAAA 3DB 05478 AAAA 3DB 05481 AAAA 3DB 04729 AAAA 3DB 05484 AAAA 3DB 05490 AAAA 3DB 05493 AAAA 3DB 05496 AAAA 3DB 04732 AAAA 9400FSO ANV P/N 3DB 04263 AAAA FACTORY P/N 522.173.500 FACTORY P/N 522.174.410 522.174.500 522.174.600 522.174.000 522.174.700 522.174.900 522.175.000 522.175.100 522.144.100
1+0 for Free Space Optics application PRODUCT 9400FSO RELEASE 1.00.00
b) c)
NE applicability This handbook applies to the following Network Elements (NE): ULS SWP Version applicability This handbook applies to the following Software Package Releases (SWP) and SWP versions: SWP Release SWP ANV & FACTORY P/N ref.Tab. 16. on p g 229 page SWP Version (N.B.1) V.1.0.0 (N.B.2) SWP 9400AWY R.1.0 CDROM V.1.0.1 (N.B.3) V.1.0.2
N.B.1
For the meaning of SWP Release and Version, please refer to para.E.2.5.2 on page 286. The indication of the Versions in this handbook has the following meaning: this handbook applies starting from the Versions stated in this table, but it could also apply to subsequent Versions for the following reasons: a) the Operator Handbook is not modified, unless the new version distributed to the Customers comprises changes to the manmachine interface, or even in the presence of minor changes that do not affect negatively the understandability of the procedures described therein (e.g. a button moved internally to a screen);
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.2: N.B.3:
furthermore, if the screens contained in the handbook show the versionrelease of the productrelease, then they are not replaced in the subsequent versions of handbook if their contents remains unchanged. Version 1.0.0 manages the Radio application only (1+0 configuration). Versions from 1.0.1 manages the Radio application (1+0 and 1+1 configurations) and the FSO application. 03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 274 / 296
b)
ED
E.1.2 : Purpose of the handbook This handbook belongs to the Customer Documentation set envisaged for the equipment specified in para. E.1.1 on page 274. Please refer to para.E.2 on page 279 to have the list and description of such Customer Documentation set. This handbook describes the operation and maintenance activities the operators can carry out according the specific software application(s) referred to in this handbook (see para. E.1.1 on page 274). This handbook must be used together with the associated Technical Handbook and, with some exceptions, does not replicate information contained into it. In particular, all cautions relevant to safety on rules for EMC and ESD, as well as warnings regarding operations that may cause damages to the equipment, are not duplicated here, but must be retrieved from the Technical Handbook. When using this handbook, it is assumed that the Operators know: the structure (hardware composition) and all the possible operating modes of the equipment (product-release) that this handbook refers to. how to use a PC and the Windows environment applications.
Before accessing other sections of this handbook, read completely this section in order to have information on: SWP P/Ns and composition how to access the other sections of this handbook according to the SWP type (if more than one envisaged) how to manage Craft Terminal SW and Equipment SW for new installations or for upgrading previous installation to the new SW version. how to make ECTequipment remote connection on Public Switched Telephone Network.
The document that should be read before starting this document is: 9400 AWY Technical Handbook from Ed.03 for the Radio application. 9400 FSO Technical Handbook for the FSO application. N.B. In any case, the Technical Handbook must be always available to the Operator in charge of the equipment software management, as it contains information and documents that are used in the procedures described in this manual (e.g. the hardware setting documents, the unit replacement procedures (N.B.), etc.).
Reading the following manual: 1320CT Basic Operators Handbook V3.0.1
is not strictly necessary before starting this document, but its knowledge is necessary for operating the procedures introduced by this document and detailed in the other sections of this Handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 275 / 296
E.1.3 : Handbook history The first and the two most recent editions of the document are indicated in the table of contents. Changes with respect to the previous edition are pointed out by revision bars. The following Tab. 24. indicates the handbook parts new and modified with respect to the previous edition. Legend n = new part Tab. 24. Handbook history HANDBOOK EDITION FRONT MATTER Preliminary information Handbook applicability, purpose and history Handbook structure SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling Cautions to avoid equipment damage Quick guide SECTION 1: INSTALLATION 11 12 13 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 211 SWP installation in PC environment SWP download toward NE NE Upgrade to a newer SWP version (same SWP release) General introduction on views and menus Configuration Equipment Line Interface Radio FSO External input and output points Supervision Protection schemes Diagnosis 01 n n n n n n n n n n m m m m n m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m 02 03 04 05 m = modified part blank= part unchanged
SECTION 2: AWY/FSO NE MANAGEMENT
n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n
210 Loopbacks 212 Performance Monitoring 213 Software Download SECTION 3: AWY/FSO NE MAINTENANCE 31 32 Maintenance introduction Troubleshooting
table continues
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 276 / 296
Tab. 24. Handbook history HANDBOOK EDITION SECTION 4: SWP DESCRIPTION AND VERSIONS
01 n n n
02 m m n
03 m m m n m m
04
05
41 42 43 44 A B C D E F G
SWP REG.9400AWY R.1.0 description SWP REG.9400AWY R.1.0 V.1.0.0 specific information SWP REG.9400AWY R.1.0 V.1.0.1 specific information SWP REG.9400AWY R.1.0 V.1.0.2 specific information Equipment description and components SW allocation, Flash Card and equipment control General on SWP installation ECTEquipment connection via public switched telephone network Documentation Guide Acronyms and abbreviations Glossary of terms
SECTION 5: APPENDICES
E.1.3.1: Notes on on Ed.01 Draft editions neither validated nor officially released issue, for internal validation purposes: Ed.01ADRAFT created on December 12th, 2003 Ed.01BDRAFT created on January 26th, 2004 Ed.01CDRAFT created on March 9th, 2004 Ed.01 created on May 19th, 2004 is the first released and validated version of the handbook.
E.1.3.2: Notes on Ed.02 Ed.02 created on July 23rd, 2004 is the second released and validated version of the handbook. This issue has been done to align the handbook to the new features of SWP version V.1.0.1; for a summary, see new Chapter 43 SWP R.1.0 V.1.0.1 specific information in section SWP DESCRIPTION AND VERSIONS. Changes related to this new version have been introduced throughout the handbook, where necessary.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 277 / 296

n n n n n n n n m m m
E.1.3.3: Notes on Ed.03 Draft editions neither validated nor officially released issue, for internal validation purposes: Ed.03ADRAFT created on November 16th, 2004 (authors G.Ziliani & E.Corradini) Ed.03BDRAFT created on December 3rd, 2004 (author C.Nava) Ed.03CDRAFT created on December 21st, 2004 (authors G.Ziliani & E.Corradini) Ed.03 created on December 22nd, 2004 is the third released and validated version of the handbook. This issue has been done to align the handbook to the new features of SWP version V.1.0.2; for a summary, see new Chapter 44 SWP R.1.0 V.1.0.2 specific information in section SWP DESCRIPTION AND VERSIONS. Changes related to this new version have been introduced throughout the handbook, where necessary. Other main changes are: Cautions to avoid equipment damage in front matter improved in addition to changes for V1.0.2, section INSTALLATION has been fully revised and improved in addition to changes for V1.0.2, section AWY/FSO NE MANAGEMENT has been fully revised and improved. This edition can be used also with previous versions V1.0.0 & V1.0.1. Revision bars point out major (listed above) and minor (not listed above) modifications with respect to previous edition. Revision bars in correspondence of empty lines or empty table rows point out parts eliminated. Errors found in previous edition have been corrected.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 278 / 296
E.2 : Documentation set description

This paragraph contains all information regarding the Customer Documentation set this handbook belongs to: 9400AWY Rel.1.0 productreleaseversion handbooks 9400FSO Rel.1.0 productreleaseversion handbooks Handbooks common to 9400AWY Rel.1.0 and 9400FSO Rel.1.0 Specific documentation for SNMP General on Alcatel Customer Documentation on page 280 on page 282 on page 284 on page 285 on page 285 including: on page 285 on page 286 on page 288
CustomerIndependent Standard Customer Documentation Product levels and associated Customer Documentation Handbook and CDROM supply to Customers
The list of handbooks given in the following is valid as at the issue date of this Handbook and can be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook. Some of the handbooks listed in the following may not be available as at the issue date of this Handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 279 / 296
E.2.1 : 9400AWY Rel.1.0 productreleaseversion handbooks This paragraph lists and briefly describes the handbooks making up the documentation set envisaged for 9400AWY Rel.1.0 product release. Please refer to following para.E.2.5 on page 285 for a general description of Alcatel Customer Documentation system. The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the 9400AWY Rel.1.0 system is modularly composed by different handbooks. Tab. 25. herebelow lists the handbooks. The [REF] indication in Tab. 25. is relevant to the handbook brief description given in tables Tab. 26. thru Tab. 28. and Tab. 33. thru Tab. 34. in the following.
Tab. 25. 9400AWY Rel.1.0 product release handbooks TECHNICAL HANDBOOK 9400AWY Technical Handbook INSTALLATION AND LINEUP HANDBOOKS 9400AWY Installation Handbook 9400AWY Lineup Guide OPERATORS HANDBOOKS (in alternative, according to SWP used) 9400AWY/FSO CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0 9400AWY/FSO CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.1 DOCUMENTATION CDROM DCP 9400AWY R.1.0 CD_ROM 1320 CT OPERATORS HANDBOOKS 1320CT Basic Operators Handbook AS Operators Handbook ELB Operators Handbook see Tab. 34. on page 284 [D] [I] [J] [B] [C] REF [A]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 280 / 296
Tab. 26. 9400AWY Rel.1.0 Technical Handbook REF

HANDBOOK 9400 AWY Rel. 1.0 Technical Handbook
ANV P/N Factory P/N 3DB 05653 BAAA without Factory P/N
NOTES from ED.03
[A]
It provides information regarding AWY equipment description and composition, station layouts, hardware setting documentation and maintenance.
Tab. 27. 9400AWY Rel.1.0 Installation and LineUp Handbooks The Installation Handbook provides information regarding Equipment installation, according to Alcatel Installation Engineering Dept. rules. The Lineup Guide provides information regarding equipment line up and commissioning, according to Alcatel Installation Engineering Dept. rules. HANDBOOK 9400 AWY Rel.1.0 Installation Handbook 9400 AWY Rel.1.0 Lineup Guide ANV P/N Factory P/N 3DB 05653 DAAA without Factory P/N 3DB 05653 EAAA without Factory P/N NOTES
REF [B] [C]
Tab. 28. 9400AWY Rel.1.0 Documentation on CDROM REF CDROM TITLE DCP 9400AWY 1.0 CD_ROM [D] ANV P/N Factory P/N 3DB 05653 AAAA 417.200.029 NOTES
Contains, in electronic format (ACROBAT pdf files), all handbooks listed in Tab. 25. on page 280 (when all envisaged handbooks are released), with exception of 1320 CT Operators Handbooks
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 281 / 296
E.2.2 : 9400FSO Rel.1.0 productreleaseversion handbooks This paragraph lists and briefly describes the handbooks making up the documentation set envisaged for 9400FSO Rel.1.0 product release. Please refer to following para.E.2.5 on page 285 for a general description of Alcatel Customer Documentation system. The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the 9400FSO Rel.1.0 system is modularly composed by different handbooks. Tab. 29. herebelow lists the handbooks. The [REF] indication in Tab. 29. is relevant to the handbook brief description given in tables Tab. 30. thru Tab. 34. in the following. Tab. 29. 9400FSO Rel.1.0 product release handbooks TECHNICAL HANDBOOK 9400FSO Technical Handbook INSTALLATION AND LINEUP HANDBOOKS 9400FSO Installation Handbook 9400FSO Lineup Guide OPERATORS HANDBOOKS (in alternative, according to SWP used) 9400AWY/FSO CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0 9400AWY/FSO CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.1 DOCUMENTATION CDROM DCP 9400FSO R.1.0 CD_ROM 1320 CT OPERATORS HANDBOOKS 1320CT Basic Operators Handbook AS Operators Handbook ELB Operators Handbook see Tab. 34. on page 284 [H] [I] [J] [F] [G] REF [E]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 282 / 296
Tab. 30. 9400FSO Rel.1.0 Technical Handbook REF

HANDBOOK 9400FSO Rel.1.0 Technical Handbook
ANV P/N Factory P/N 3DB 05654 BAAA without Factory P/N
NOTES
[E]
It provides information regarding FSO equipment description and composition, station layouts, hardware setting documentation and maintenance.
Tab. 31. 9400FSO Rel.1.0 Installation and LineUp Handbooks The Installation Handbook provides information regarding Equipment installation, according to Alcatel Installation Engineering Dept. rules. The Lineup Guide provides information regarding equipment line up and commissioning, according to Alcatel Installation Engineering Dept. rules. HANDBOOK 9400FSO Rel.1.0 Installation Handbook 9400FSO Rel.1.0 Lineup Guide ANV P/N Factory P/N 3DB 05654 CAAA without Factory P/N 3DB 05654 DAAA without Factory P/N NOTES
REF [F] [G]
Tab. 32. 9400AWY Rel.1.0 Documentation on CDROM REF CDROM TITLE DCP 9400FSO 1.0 CD_ROM [H] ANV P/N Factory P/N 3DB 05654 AAAA 417.200.030 NOTES
Contains, in electronic format (ACROBAT pdf files), all handbooks listed in Tab. 29. on page 282 (when all envisaged handbooks are released), with exception of 1320 CT Operators Handbooks
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 283 / 296
E.2.3 : Handbooks common to 9400AWY Rel.1.0 and 9400FSO Rel.1.0
REF [I] [J]
HANDBOOK 9400 AWY/FSO Rel.1.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0 9400 AWY/FSO Rel.1.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.1
ANV P/N Factory P/N 3DB 05653 CAAA without Factory P/N 3DB 05653 FAAA without Factory P/N
NOTES nb1 this handbook nb2
Provides AWY/FSO SWP screens and operational procedures for Equipment SW management and maintenance. nb1 nb2 SWP identification: ref.Tab. 16. on page 229 SWP identification: t.b.d.
Tab. 34. Documentation common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform REF Q3CTP Version (N.B.) q 3.0.1 [K] HANDBOOK 1320CT Rel.3.x Basic Operators Handbook ANV P/N Factory P/N 3AL 79551 AAAA 957.140.042 N NOTES
Provides general information and operational procedures common to all 1320CT (Craft terminal) of Alcatel InfoModel Network Elements. q 3.0.1 AS Rel.6.5 Operators Handbook 3AL 88876 AAAA without Factory P/N
[L]
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the alarm Surveillance software embedded in the 1320CT software package. q 3.0.1 ELB Rel.2.x Operators Handbook 3AL 88877 AAAA without Factory P/N
[M]
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Event Log Browser software embedded in the 1320CT software package. q 3.0.1 DCP 1320 CT 3.x CD_ROM EN 3AL 79552 AAAA 417.100.032
[N]
Contains, in electronic format, the 1320 CT Operators Handbook REF.[K] to [N] N.B. The CT Version is displayed when, on the PC, you select the 1320CT application for its launch. The Q3CTP/K Version embedded in the SWP this handbook refers to, is specified in the paragraph ECT SW SubComponents of chapter (in Section 4 SWP DESCRIPTION AND VERSIONS) related to the SWP version you use.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 284 / 296
Tab. 33. Operators Handbooks related to the specific Software Package SWP
E.2.4 : Specific documentation for SNMP The documents relevant to SNMP are not available as individual items, but are directly included in the SNMP SWP CDROMs themselves.
E.2.5 : General on Alcatel Customer Documentation This paragraph describes in general the Alcatel Customer Documentation system, details the association between the product levels and the associated documentation, and explains Customer Documentation characteristics as well as the policies for its delivery and updating.
E.2.5.1: CustomerIndependent Standard Customer Documentation a) Definition Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as plantindependent and is always independent of any Customization. Plantdependent and/or Customized documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to commercial criteria as far as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned N.B. b) Plantdependent and Customized documentation is not described here.
Aims of standard Customer Documentation Standard system, hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel the possibility and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating, and maintaining the equipment according to Alcatel Laboratory design and Installation Dept. choices. In particular: N.B. the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the explanation of the manmachine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it; maintenance is described down to faulty PCB location and replacement. No supply to Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design and production documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is envisaged.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 285 / 296
E.2.5.2: Product levels and associated Customer Documentation See Fig. 168. on page 287.
a)
Products A product is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole of performances and services that it is meant for. E.g. 9400AWY is a product. Product-releases A product evolves through successive product-releases, which are the real products marketed for their delivery at a certain product-release availability date. A certain product-release performs more functionalities than the previous one. E.g. Rel.1.0 and Rel.2.0 are two successive product-releases of the same product. A productrelease comprehends a set of hardware components and at least one Software Package (SWP); as a whole, they identify the possible network applications and the equipment performances that the specific product-release has been designed, engineered, and marketed for. Configurations and Network Elements In some cases, a product-release includes different possible configurations which are distinguished from one another by different Network Element (NE) types and, from the management point of view, by different SWPs. SWP Releases and Versions See Fig. 167. herebelow. A SWP is identified by the configuration name and by the version number (tree digits). The versions first digit corresponds to the productrelease number first digit; the second digit identifies, together with the first, the SWP release. The third digit of the SWP version identifies the Patch Level of the SWP Release. SWP version SWP Release Product Releases first digit SWP evolution for bug fixing purposes or minor additional features (same SWP Release within same ProductRelease) SWP evolution for additional features (new SWP Release within same ProductRelease) Product Release) (N.B. see next page) SWP evolution for additional features (new SWP Release of a new ProductRelease) 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 2. 0. 0. 0. 1. 0. 0. Patch Level
b)
c)
d)
7 9 7 2 7 2
Fig. 167. Example of SWP Release and Version numbering

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 286 / 296
N.B.
Sometimes, different SWP Releases (within the same ProductRelease) are commercially distinguished by different names, e.g. : SWP version 1.0.x 1.1.x 1.2.x SWPRelease commercial name 1.0 1.0B 1.0C
e)
Customer Documentation A product-release(configuration) has its own set of standard Customer Documentation, usually formed of several handbooks, i.e., in general: System and Hardware documentation: one (or more) Technical Handbook(s) an Installation Handbook a Commissioning Handbook or LineUp Guide Software documentation: a Craft Terminal Operators Handbook, associated to the specific SWPRelease other Operators Handbooks (typically those associated to the SW platform embedded in the SWP) PRODUCT
PRODUCTRELEASE 1.0
evolution
PRODUCTRELEASE 2.0
ALTERNATIVE CONFIGURATIONS CONFIG.A CONFIG.B
PRODUCT LEVELS DOCUMENTATION CONFIG.A System & HW Documentation
SWP REL.1.0
evolution
SWP REL.1.1
SWP REL.1.0 SW Documentation
SWP REL.1.1 SW Documentation
Fig. 168. Example of Product levels and associated Customer Documentation

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 287 / 296
E.2.5.3: Handbook and CDROM supply to Customers a) Standard supply

Handbooks and CDROMs are standard commercial items and are ordered and delivered as any other Alcatel commercial item. Handbooks and CDROMs are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer to. The number of handbooks or CDROMs per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level. b) Productdocumentation consistency Equipment description and layout are always general, i.e. they never describe the actual composition of the equipment supplied to Customer (this task is entrusted to plantdependent documentation). Detailed hardware documentation concerns actually supplied units and is coherent with the production issue of such units. Softwareassociated handbooks are coherent with the supplied SWP release. Copies of the handbooks regarding a specific productrelease previously delivered can be required specifying P/N and edition. c) Inadvance supply Whenever handbooks or CDROMs are delivered before the relevant equipment delivery, there is the risk that their contents might not agree with the characteristics of the equipment which will be delivered: the more they are in advance the less are they likely to agree. d) Supplying updated handbooks and CDROMs to Customers Supplying updated handbooks or CDROMs to Customers who have already received previous issues is subject to commercial criteria. By updated handbook delivery, we mean the supply of a complete copy of a new issue of the handbook (supplying erratacorrige sheets is not envisaged). e) Copyright notification The technical information of the handbooks and CDROMs supplied to Customers is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent. f) Supply to Customers of Customer Documentation source files Presently not envisaged.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 288 / 296
APPENDIX F : ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

N.B. For the explanation of the acronyms of the alarms refer to Section MAINTENANCE para.32.4.1 Alarm synthesis indication on page 221.
ACD: Access Control Domain ADM: Add/Drop Multiplexer AIS: Alarm Indication Signal ALR: Automatic Laser Restart ALS: Automatic Laser Shutdown ANSI: American National Standard Institute APS: Automatic Protection Switching AS: Alarm Surveillance ASAP: Alarm Severity Assignment Profile ATM: Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATPC: Automatic Transmit Power Control AVC: Attribute Value Change BBE: Background Block Error BER: Bit Error Rate BIP: Bit Interleaved Parity BKPV: Back Plane Version CPI: Control Point Input CPO: Control Point Output CRC: Cyclic Redundancy Check CSES: Consecutive Severely Errored Second CD: Current Data CDROM: Compact Disc Read Only Memory CCITT: Telegraph and Telephone International Consultative Committee CPU: Central Processor Unit CT: Craft Terminal DEM: DEModulator DTE: Data Terminal Equipment
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DTMF: Dual Tone Multi Frequency EB: Errored Block
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 289 / 296
EC: Equipment Controller ECC: Embedded Communication Channels

ECT: Equipment Craft Terminal EFD: Event Forwarding Discriminator ELB: Event Log Browsing EML: Element Management Layer EOW: Engineering Order Wire EPS: Equipment Protection Switch ES: Errored Second ETSI: European Telecommunication Standard Institute EW: Early Warning FAD: Functional Access Domain FD: Frequency Diversity FEC: Forward Error Corrector FSO: Free Space Optics FTP: File Transfer Protocol GA: General Alarm GNE: Gateway Network Element HCS: Higher order Connection Supervision HBER: High Bit Error Rate HD: History Data HET: HETerofrequency HMI: Human Machine Interface HS: High Speed HST: Hot STandby ID: Identifier IDU: InDoor Unit ISO: International Standards Organization IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IM: Information Manager
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
IP: Input Port or Internet Protocol ISO: International Standards Organization Kbit/s: Kilobits per second
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 290 / 296
LAC: Local Access Control LAN: Local Area Network

LBER: Low Bit Error Rate LCS: Lower Order Connection Supervision LO: Local Oscillator LOF: Loss Of Frame LOS: Loss Of Signal LS: Low Speed MAC: Media Access Control Mbit/s: Megabits per seconds MIB: Management Information Base MLR: Manual Laser Restart MOC: Managed Object Class MOD: Modulator MSp: Manual Switch to protecting channel MSw: Manual Switch to working channel NE: Network Element NML: Network Management Layer NMS: Network Management System NSA: Non Service Affecting NTP: Network Time Protocol OBPS: On Board Power Supply OC_F: ODU Controller_FSO OC_R: ODU Controller_Radio ODU: OutDoor Unit OH: OverHead OP: Output Port OS: Operation System OSI: Open Systems Interconnection OSPF: Open Shortest Path First
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
PDH: Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy PI: Physical Interface PLL: Phase Locked Loop
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 291 / 296
PM: Performance Monitoring PPP:Point to Point Protocol

PSU: Power Supply Unit QAM: Quadrature Amplitude Modulation QOS: Quality Of Service RAI: Remote Alarm Insertion RAM: Random Access Memory RC: Radio Controller RDI: Remote Defect Indication RECT: Remote Equipment Craft Terminal REI: Remote Error Indication RF: Radio Frequency RPS: Radio Protection Switching RS: Reed Solomon RT: Transceiver SA: Service Affecting SC: Service Channel or System Controller SD: Signal Degrade SDH: Synchronous Digital Hierarchy SES: Severly Errored Second SF: Signal Fail SSF: Server Signal Fail SWP: SoftWare Package TCP: Transmission Control Protocol TDM: Time Division Multiplexer TMN: Telecommunications Management Network TN: Telecommunications Network TP: Termination Point UAS: UnAvailable Second UAT: UnAvailable Time
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
URU: Underlying Resource UnAvailable USM: User Service Manager WST: Way Side Traffic
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 292 / 296
APPENDIX G : GLOSSARY OF TERMS

Acknowledgment: When an alarm is taken into account by the application, the operator has to acknowledge it to point out that he has seen it and that he will react in the right way. During alarm configuration it is possible to set a maximum delay for alarm acknowledgement. The operator can decide whether or not the alarm clear has to be acknowledged. Administrator: A user who has access rights to all the Management Domains of the Craft Terminal product. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities. Alarm: An alerting indication to a condition that may have an immediate or potentially negative impact on the state of an equipment or the CT. An alarm is characterized by an alarm begin and an alarm end. Alarm Profile: Function allowing the assignment of severities to the alarms depending on their probable causes. Alarm Status: Identifies the type and severity of an occurring alarm. Board: A board is part of an NE. They are electronic cards that fit into slots in the NE. Compact Disk Read Only Memory: Data saving support from which the information can only be read. Is useful for stocking data due to its available memory space. Craft Terminal: Workstation or Personal computer (PC) from which local address to an NE is possible. It can be used to configure or perform monitoring tasks on the NE. Digital Communication network: Communication Network in which the transmission of data is done in a digitized format. Element Management Layer: This application is responsible for the configuration and management of Network Elements. Equipment Protection Switching: Used to provide protection for cards within an equipment to protect traffic in the event of card failure. Flushing: This deals with logs. When a log is flushed, all its records are deleted. Functional Access Domain: It defines the range of functions which are available to a specified user. Human Machine Interface: It is the graphical user interface application through which the operators interact with the system. History Report: This function enables operators to get information concerning performances, security or alarms on entities composing the network, or on the network itself. The operator specifies the time period for which he requires the report.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 293 / 296
International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee: Standard organization for telecommunications. Now called the ITUT (International Telecommunication Union). Kilobits per second: Unit that correspond to the transmission of 103 bits every second. Line Terminal: A line terminal is the end point of a communication link. it is used to transmit or receive signals. They can undertake signal conversion functions (adapting a signal to two different transmission media) or multiplexing/demultiplexing functions. Logs: Logs are files used to store history data concerning the incoming notifications, operator commands and system alarms. The size of the log can be configured. Management Domain: The Craft Terminal product is partitioned into management domains for functional proposes. Each management domain is associated with functionalities that enable the operators to manage the NEs. Megabits per second: Unit that corresponds to the transmission of 106 bits every second. Network Access Domain: Defined as a set of Network Elements. NADs are used to define the set of Network Elements that a user can manage. Network Element: Either a telecommunication equipment or groups parts of a Telecommunication Network. Have characteristics compliant with CCITT recommendations. Network Management Level: Designates the management functions performed on networks elements assembled in a network. Notification: Spontaneous data received by the system concerning an NE. Operation System: A system dedicated to the supervision of NEs in a standard way, using protocols and interfaces. it offers to the operator a set of functions necessary to supervise the NEs. The 1353SH is an Operation System. Operator: The enduser of the Craft Terminal. He supervises a part of the network that is dependant on his user profile. Physical Interface: Electrical or Electrical/Optical transformers that decouple the line signals and adapt the form of signal for further transmission. This functional block also manages clock extraction, signal loss monitoring and loopback functions. Port: A physical point at which the Network Element can be attached to a transmission medium. A port is either a termination point or an origination point.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Severity: Linked to alarms, severities indicate the magnitude related to the failure.
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 294 / 296
Telecommunication Management Network: Defines the concept of interoperable management of TNs. They provide an organized network structure to achieve the interconnection of the different components of the TN and the services to process the information. Telecommunication Network: Describes the network to be managed. Provides the transmission, the transport and the switching supports to the interconnected Network Elements. Terminal Point: Describes either the origin or the termination of a signal in an equipment. Is related to a port. Thresholding: This is the assignment of a specified value to monitored parameters ( for example BIt Error Rates) that, when exceeded, generate trouble indications. User Profile: Identifies the functionalities of the Craft Terminal to which a user has access. A finite number of predefined user profiles is determined by a fixed set of FADs. To give user access to Craft Terminal functionality, the administrator must assign a profile to a UNIX user account by choosing one among the predefined profiles installed with Craft Terminal. User Service Manager: These are presentation processes used by the Craft Terminal to manage the Human Machine Interface and facilitate the interaction with the product.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 295 / 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
END OF DOCUMENT
3DB 05653 CA AA
296
296 / 296
Craft Terminal Operators Handbook
Alcatel 9400AWY & 9400FSO

9400AWY Rel.1.0
111315182325283238 GHz Shorthaul low/medium capacity digital microwave radio links
9400FSO Rel.1.0
PDH Low/Medium Capacity Free Space Optic System
SWP 9400AWY R.1.0

(from version V1.0.0)
3DB 05653 CAAA Ed.03
Documentation set for 9400AWY Rel.1.0 Handbook 9400AWY Technical Handbook 9400AWY Installation Handbook 9400AWY Lineup Guide ANV P/N 3DB 05653 BAAA 3DB 05653 DAAA 3DB 05653 EAAA Documentation set for 9400FSO Rel.1.0 Handbook 9400FSO Technical Handbook 9400FSO Installation Handbook 9400FSO Lineup Guide ANV P/N 3DB 05654 BAAA 3DB 05654 CAAA 3DB 05654 DAAA
Handbooks common to 9400AWY Rel.1.0 and 9400FSO Rel.1.0 Handbook 9400 AWY/FSO CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0 9400 AWY/FSO CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.1 1320CT Rel.3.x Basic Operators Handbook AS Rel.6.5 Operators Handbook ELB Rel.2.x Operators Handbook ANV P/N 3DB 05653 CAAA 3DB 05653 FAAA 3AL 79551 AAAA 3AL 88876 AAAA 3AL 88877 AAAA
this handbook
When supplied on paper, this handbook is divided by registers, for an easier access to the information herein contained:
CONTENTS
FRONT MATTER: TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES PRELIMINARY INFORMATION SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING CAUTIONS TO AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE QUICK GUIDE SECTION 1: INSTALLATION SECTION 2: AWY/FSO NE MANAGEMENT SECTION 3: AWY/FSO MAINTENANCE SECTION 4: SWP DESCRIPTION AND VERSIONS SECTION 5: APPENDICES
REGISTER
1 2 3 4 5
QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK
COD.MANUALE HDBK P/N: 3DB
05653 CAAA Ed.03 9400AWY & 9400FSO Rel.1.0 SWP REG.9400AWY R.1.0 C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK
ORIGINALE INTERLEAF: FILE ARCHIVIAZIONE: cod ANV (PD1-PD2)

No PAGINE TOTALI PER ARCHIVIAZIONE: 298+4 = 302 DIMENSIONE BINDER SORGENTE (du ks): 443.620 Mbyte
INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA - ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING COMPOSIZIONE ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE: HANDBOOK COMPOSITION AND ASSEMBLY: SERVONO 5 SEPARATORI NUMERATI DA 1 A 5 5 REGISTERS NUMBERED FROM 1 TO 5 ARE NECESSARY No pagine (facciate) No pages TARGHETTE - LABELS FRONTESPIZIO - FRONT FRONT MATTER INSERIRE SEPARATORE 1 - INSERT REGISTER 1 SECTION 1: INSTALLATION INSERIRE SEPARATORE 2 - INSERT REGISTER 2 SECTION 2: AWY/FSO NE MANAGEMENT INSERIRE SEPARATORE 3 - INSERT REGISTER 3 SECTION 3: AWY/FSO MAINTENANCE INSERIRE SEPARATORE 4 - INSERT REGISTER 4 SECTION 4: SWP DESCRIPTION AND VERSIONS INSERIRE SEPARATORE 5 - INSERT REGISTER 5 SECTION 5: APPENDICES TOTALE PAGINE A4 (FACCIATE) TOTAL A4 PAGES: TOTALE FOGLI A4 TOTAL A4 SHEETS: 298 149 241/296 296/296 227/296 240/296 215/296 226/296 77/296 214/296 21/296 76/296 2 1/296 20/296 numerate numbered da from a to
fase step
i ii iii iv v vi vii viii ix x xi xii xiii

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
RELEASED 3DB 05653 CAAA TQZZA 4 Y 1/ 4
QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK
Site VIMERCATE Originators E.CORRADINI G.ZILIANI C.NAVA
WTD 9400AWY REL.1.0 9400FSO REL.1.0 SWP 9400AWY R1.0 UP V102 : : : : 9400AWY & 9400FSO Rel.1.0 SWP 9400AWY R.1.0 9400AWY & 9400FSO C.T. OPERATORS HDBK Internal : External :
Domain Division Rubric Type Distribution Codes
Approvals Name App. Name App. A.FUMAGALLI V.RODELLA A.BESTETTI
WARNING FOR A-UNITS OTHER THAN A-ITALY Labels are done according to A-Italy binder format. Source files and printable files of this handbook are archived in ePDM: Source file: ALICE 6.10 ARCHIVED BY GAPI 3.9.1 Printable file: PDF file must be opened with ACROBAT Reader Version 5.0 at least.
3DB 05653 CAAA Ed.03 9400AWY & 9400FSO Rel.1.0 SWP REG.9400AWY R.1.0 1138 GHz shorthaul low/medium capacity digital microwave radio links PDH Low/Medium Capacity Free Space Optic System C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
9400AWY & 9400FSO Rel.1.0

SWP REG.9400AWY R.1.0

1138 GHz shorthaul low/medium capacity digital microwave radio links PDH Low/Medium Capacity Free Space Optic System
C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK

VOL.1/1
9400AWY & 9400FSO Rel.1.0


VOL.1/1
9400AWY & 9400FSO Rel.1.0
VOL.1/1
9400AWY & 9400FSO Rel.1.0

SWP REG.9400AWY R.1.0 3DB 05653 CAAA Ed.03
VOL.1/1
9400AWY & 9400FSO Rel.1.0

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
VOL.1/1
ED
03
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
RELEASED
END OF DOCUMENT
3DB 05653 CAAA TQZZA
4/ 4

9400 SWP10

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

9400 SWP10

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SWP 9400AWY R1.0 C.T. OPER.

041222 040723 040519 DATE

9400AWYFSO REL.1.0 SWP VERSION UP TO V1.0.2 OPERATORS HANDBOOK

03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 1 / 296

SECTION 2: AWY/FSO NE MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 2 / 296

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 3 / 296

SECTION 3: AWY/FSO MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

SECTION 4: SWP DESCRIPTION AND VERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 4 / 296

SECTION 5: APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 5 / 296

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 6 / 296

266 266 268 269 270 271 271 272

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

29 30 30 31 32 32 33 34 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 55 80 81 82 86 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 102 103 103 104 105 106 108

03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 7 / 296

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 8 / 296

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 9 / 296

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 10 / 296

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 11 / 296

HANDBOOK APPLICABILITY, PURPOSE AND HISTORY

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 12 / 296

SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING

Moving mechanical parts

Heatradiating mechanical parts

Equipment emitting RF power

Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges: TOPIC WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT

Device sensitive to electrostatic discharges

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) Other Labels affixed to the Equipment

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 13 / 296

WARNING FOR 9400FSO ODU EQUIPMENT!

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 14 / 296

CAUTIONS TO AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE

2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 % 2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) " 10 %

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 15 / 296

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 16 / 296

Right operations for board insertion in the subrack

1) Open the levers before to plug the unit.

3) Push on the levers in order to finish the connector mating. i)

Forbidden operations for board insertion in the subrack

Dont push just on one lever only.

Dont force the units.

Avoid impact during the units handling.

03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 17 / 296

physically install and cable the equipment hardware

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 05653 CA AA 296 18 / 296